aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorGravatar Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org>2016-11-07 21:16:18 -0800
committerGravatar Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org>2016-11-09 06:25:11 -0800
commit97be5fda2c9ed3cf135c31a0e2c77107ab2d7eb1 (patch)
treef69b9d492c4ac79927c8c7ce86fc46609db84745
parent36b014024cf0684fb921756e010a1cb97bf6a8a5 (diff)
downloadsubsurface-97be5fda2c9ed3cf135c31a0e2c77107ab2d7eb1.tar.gz
Update bundled user-manual HTML files
Signed-off-by: Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org>
-rw-r--r--Documentation/user-manual.html.git1618
-rw-r--r--Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git1270
2 files changed, 1741 insertions, 1147 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/user-manual.html.git b/Documentation/user-manual.html.git
index dc2e19dc4..2e04e30b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/user-manual.html.git
+++ b/Documentation/user-manual.html.git
@@ -525,18 +525,22 @@ For instance, typing the word "<em>weights</em>" into the search text
box, searches throughout the user manual. To the right of the
search text box are two arrows pointing up and down. These find
the previous and the next occurrence of the search term.
-<span class="image">
-<img src=":images/usermanualfunctions.jpg" alt="User manual functions" />
-</span>
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/UserManualSearch.jpg" alt="User manual functions" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<em>PREVIOUS/NEXT LINK</em>. Move between links (underlined words that
jump to specific sections in the user manual) by right-clicking on the text of the manual.
-This brings up a context menu to previous links selected.
-(see image above). For instance if a link has been selected, then the option
-to <em>Go Back</em> shows the text at the last link selected
+This brings up a context menu to PREVIOUS links selected.
+(see image below). For instance if a link has been selected, then the option
+to <em>Go Back</em> shows the text at the previous link selected
(similar to the Previous Page button in a browser). Conversely the <em>Go Forward</em> option
jumps to the
text seen before selecting the <em>Go Back</em> option. The <em>Reload</em>
@@ -544,6 +548,11 @@ option reloads the complete user manual into the window.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/UserManualLinksBack.jpg" alt="User manual functions" />
+</div>
+</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
@@ -580,7 +589,8 @@ between dives. The <strong>Dive List</strong> is an important tool for manipulat
<li>
<p>
The <strong>Dive Map</strong> on the bottom right, showing the user&#8217;s dive sites on a world map
-and centered on the site of the last dive selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>.
+and centered on the site of the last dive selected in the <strong>Dive List</strong>. The map
+scale can be increased or decreased.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -593,7 +603,8 @@ highlighted dive(s).
<li>
<p>
The <strong>Dive Profile</strong> on the top right, showing a graphical dive profile of the
-selected dive in the <strong>Dive List</strong>.
+selected dive in the <strong>Dive List</strong>. You can zoom
+into the dive profile for a more detailed view.
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
@@ -643,27 +654,33 @@ saved before a new logbook is created.</p></div>
<h2 id="S_GetInformation">5. Storing dive information in the logbook</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Now that a new logbook is created, it is simple to add dive data it.
-<em>Subsurface</em> allows several ways of adding dive data to a logbook.
-1) If the user has a handwritten divelog, a spreadsheet or another form of
+<em>Subsurface</em> allows several ways of adding dive data to a logbook.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>1) If the user has a handwritten divelog, a spreadsheet or another form of
manually maintained divelog, dive data can be added to the logbook using
- one of these approaches:
- - Enter dive information by hand. This is useful if the diver didn’t
- use a dive computer and dives were recorded in a written logbook. See:
- <a href="#S_EnterData">Entering dive information by hand</a></p></div>
+ one of these approaches:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
+Enter dive information by hand. This is useful if the diver didn’t
+ use a dive computer and dives were recorded in a written logbook. See:
+ <a href="#S_EnterData">Entering dive information by hand</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
Import dive log information that has been maintained either as a spreadsheet
or as a CSV file. Refer to: <a href="#S_Appendix_D">APPENDIX D: Exporting a spreadsheet to CSV format</a> and
to <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format</a>.
-2) If a dive is recorded using a dive computer, the depth profile
-and a large amount of additional information can be accessed.
-These dives can be imported from:
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>2) If a dive is recorded using a dive computer, the depth profile
+and a large amount of additional information can be accessed.
+These dives can be imported from:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-The dive computer itself. See: <a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer">Importing new dive information from a Dive Computer</a> or
+The dive computer itself. See: <a href="#S_ImportDiveComputer">Importing new dive information from a Dive Computer</a>;
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -709,9 +726,10 @@ displayed in all the panels under Notes and Equipment when in <strong>Editing Mo
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Apply changes</em> button should only be selected after all the parts of a dive have been entered.
When entering dives by hand, the <em>Info</em>, <em>Equipment</em> and <em>Profile</em> tabs should be completed
-before saving the information. By selecting the <em>Apply changes</em> button, a local copy of the information
-for this specific dive is saved in memory. The <em>Apply changes</em> button should ONLY be selected after all parts
-of a dive have been entered. When you close Subsurface, the program will
+before applying the information. By selecting the <em>Apply changes</em> button, a local copy of the information
+for this specific dive is saved in memory but NOT written to disk.
+The <em>Apply changes</em> button should ONLY be selected after all parts
+of a dive have been entered. When closing Subsurface, the program will
ask again, this time whether the complete dive log should be saved on disk or not.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">5.1.1. Creating a Dive Profile</h4>
@@ -911,13 +929,12 @@ Then select the <em>Download</em> button.
Depending on the make of the dive computer and/or number of recorded dives, this
could take some time. Be patient. The <em>Download</em> dialogue
shows a
- progress bar at the bottom of the dialogue. Remember for some dive computers
- progress information could be inaccurate since the program doesn’t know how much
- downloadable data there is until the download is complete. After successful download, Dialogue <strong>B</strong>
- in the figure above appears.
+ progress bar at the bottom of the dialogue. Remember for some dive computers
+ progress information could be inaccurate since <em>Subsurface</em> doesn’t know how much
+ downloadable data there are until the download is complete.
After the dives have been downloaded, they appear in a tabular format on the right-hand
- side of the dialogue (see image <strong>B</strong>, above). Each dive comprises a row in the table, with the date, duration
- and depth shown. Next to each dive is a checkbox: check all the dives that need to
+ side of the dialogue (see image <strong>B</strong>, above). Each dive comprises a row in the table, showing the date, duration
+ and depth. Next to each dive is a checkbox: check all the dives that need to
be transferred to the <strong>Dive List</strong>. In the case of the image above, the last six dives are
checked and will be transferred to the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Then
click the <em>OK</em> button at the bottom of the dialogue. All the imported dives appear
@@ -926,14 +943,10 @@ Then select the <em>Download</em> button.
computer to conserve its battery power.
</p>
</li>
-</ul></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Then click the OK button.
-The checked dives are transferred to the <strong>Dive List</strong>.</p></div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
If there is a problem in communicating with the dive computer, an error
- message will be shown, similar to this text: "Unable to open /dev/ttyUSB0 Mares
+ message is shown, similar to this text: "Unable to open /dev/ttyUSB0 Mares
(Puck Pro)". Refer to the text in the box below.
</p>
</li>
@@ -987,8 +1000,8 @@ On Unix-like operating systems, does the user have write permission to the
<div class="paragraph"><p>If the <em>Subsurface</em> computer does not recognize the USB adaptor by
showing an appropriate device name next to the Mount Point, then there is a
possibility the cable or USB adaptor is faulty. A faulty cable is the most
-common cause of communication failure between a dive computer and <em>Subsurface</em>
-computer. It’s also possible the <em>Subsurface</em> computer cannot interpret
+common cause of communication failure between a dive computer and <em>Subsurface</em>.
+It’s also possible <em>Subsurface</em> cannot interpret
the data. Perform a download for diagnostic purposes with the following
two boxes checked in the download dialogue discussed above:</p></div>
<div class="literalblock">
@@ -1026,29 +1039,30 @@ four steps:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Be sure Bluetooth is activated on the host computer running <em>Subsurface</em>.
+Ensure Bluetooth is activated on the host computer running <em>Subsurface</em>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Be sure <em>Subsurface</em> sees the Bluetooth adapter on the host computer.
+Ensure <em>Subsurface</em> sees the Bluetooth adapter on the host computer.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Be sure the Bluetooth-enabled dive computer is Bluetooth-discoverable and in PC upload mode.
+Ensure the Bluetooth-enabled dive computer is Bluetooth-discoverable and in PC upload mode.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Be sure <em>Subsurface</em> is paired with the Bluetooth-enabled dive computer.
+Ensure <em>Subsurface</em> is paired with the Bluetooth-enabled dive computer.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Select the Download dialogue by selecting
-<em>Import &#8594; Import from dive computer</em> from the <strong>Main Menu</strong>. If you check the
-box labelled <em>"Choose Bluetooth download mode"</em>, the dialogue below appears.
-===== On Linux or MacOS:</p></div>
+<em>Import &#8594; Import from dive computer</em> from the <strong>Main Menu</strong>. After checking the
+box labelled <em>"Choose Bluetooth download mode"</em>, the dialogue below appears.</p></div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_on_linux_or_macos">On Linux or MacOS:</h5>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/DC_import_Bluetooth.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Download Bluetooth" />
@@ -1057,15 +1071,15 @@ box labelled <em>"Choose Bluetooth download mode"</em>, the dialogue below appea
<div class="paragraph"><p>On the <em>Linux</em> or <em>MacOS</em> platforms the name
of the <em>Subsurface</em> computer and its Bluetooth address are shown on the right hand side,
On the left hand side, if the
-computer has connected more than one local Bluetooth devices the user can use
+computer has connected more than one local Bluetooth devices you can use
the list box to indicate which one needs to connect to <em>Subsurface</em>.
The power state (on/off) of the Bluetooth adapter is shown below
the address and can be changed by checking the <em>Turn on/off</em> box.
If the Bluetooth address is not shown, then <em>Subsurface</em> does not see the local
-Bluetooth device. Be sure the Bluetooth driver is installed correctly on the
+Bluetooth device. Ensure the Bluetooth driver is installed correctly on the
<em>Subsurface</em> computer and check if it can be used by other Bluetooth utilities like
-<em>bluetoothctl</em> or <em>bluemoon</em>. This finishes the first two steps above.
-Be sure the Bluetooth-enabled dive computer is in PC-upload mode and it
+<em>bluetoothctl</em> or <em>bluemoon</em>. This completes the first two steps above.
+Ensure the Bluetooth-enabled dive computer is in PC-upload mode and it
is discoverable by other Bluetooth devices. Consult the manual of the dive
computer for more information. Now the third item in the list above has been finished.
Select the <em>Scan</em> button towards the bottom left of the dialogue above. After
@@ -1114,6 +1128,7 @@ Request PIN code
This closes the Bluetooth dialogue. Now select <em>Download</em> in the <em>Download from
dive computer</em> dialogue which should still be open. The downloaded dives are
shown on the righthand side of the download dialogue.</p></div>
+</div>
<div class="sect4">
<h5 id="_on_windows">On Windows:</h5>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -1131,7 +1146,7 @@ request a Pass Code or PIN number. Supply the Pass Code recommended in the user
A Pass Code or PIN of 0000 is often the default.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The pairing step is checked and done automatically during
the download process. If the devices have never been paired the system will ask
-for your permission and put a message on the right side of the screen: <em>Add a
+permission and put a message on the right side of the screen: <em>Add a
device, Tap to set up your DC device</em>. Always allow this pairing. After a
discovered item is selected, select the <em>Save</em> button.
Finally select the <em>Download</em> button on the <em>Download</em> dialogue and wait for the process to complete.</p></div>
@@ -1211,8 +1226,8 @@ visible (left hand image, below):</p></div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The right hand image, above, shows a <strong>Notes tab</strong> filled with dive information.
The <strong>Time</strong> field reflects the date and time of the dive. By clicking
-the date, a calendar is displayed from which
-you can choose the correct date. Press ESC to close the calendar.
+the date, a calendar is displayed for selecting
+the correct date. Press ESC to close the calendar.
The time values (hour and minutes) can also be
edited directly by clicking on each of them in the text box and by over-typing the
information displayed.</p></div>
@@ -1225,7 +1240,7 @@ If editing is required, only a value is required, the units of temperature will
automatically supplied by
<em>Subsurface</em> (following the <em>Preferences</em>, metric or imperial units will
be used).</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Location</strong>:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_locations"><p><strong>Location</strong>:</p></div>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -1276,15 +1291,15 @@ Use the world map in the bottom right hand part
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Use the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app if you
- have an Android or iPhone device with GPS and if the dive site coordinates
- were stored using it.
+Use eiher the Subsurface-Mobile App or the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion App on an
+ Android or iPhone device with GPS and if the dive site coordinates
+ were stored using one of these apps.
<a href="#S_Companion">Click here for more information</a>
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Enter by hand if the coordinates are known, using one of
+Enter coordiantes by hand if they are known, using one of
four formats with latitude followed by longitude:
</p>
<div class="literalblock">
@@ -1308,7 +1323,7 @@ name - so <strong>saving</strong> a dive site with only coordinates and no name
causes problems. (Subsurface will think all of these
dives have the same location and try to keep their GPS coordinates the
same).</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Dive site name lookup:</strong> If coordinates have been typed into the appropriate
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Dive site name lookup:</strong> If you typed coordinates into the appropriate
text box, you can do an automated name lookup based on the coordinates.
This is done when <em>Subsurface</em> uses the Internet to find the name of the dive site
based on the coordinates that were typed. If a name has been found, it is
@@ -1337,17 +1352,15 @@ offered.</p></div>
Auto selection of the suit description is available.
Some dry-suit users may choose to use this field to record what combination of
suit and thermal under suit was used.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Rating</strong>: You can provide a subjective overall rating of the dive on a
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Rating</strong>: Provide a subjective overall rating of the dive on a
5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star on the rating scale.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Visibility</strong>: You can provide a rating of visibility during the
-dive on a
-5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Visibility</strong>: Provide a rating of visibility during the
+dive on a 5-point scale by clicking the appropriate star.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Tags</strong>: Tags that describe the type of dive done can be entered
here (separated by commas). Examples of common tags are boat, drift, training,
cave, etc.
-<em>Subsurface</em> has many built-in tags. If you starts typing a tag, the
-program
-will list the tags that correspond to the typing. For instance, by typing
+<em>Subsurface</em> has many built-in tags. By starting to type a tag, <em>Subsurface</em> lists
+the tags that correspond to the typing. For instance, by typing
<code>cav</code>, the tags <strong>cave</strong> and <strong>cavern</strong> are shown to choose from.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Notes</strong>: Any additional information for the dive can be entered here.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Apply changes</em> and <em>Discard changes</em> buttons are used to save all the information for tabs
@@ -1357,7 +1370,7 @@ shows an example of a <strong>Notes tab</strong> after completing the dive infor
</div>
<div class="sect4">
<h5 id="_equipment">Equipment</h5>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab lets you enter information about the type of
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The Equipment tab allow entering information about the type of
cylinder and gas used, as well as the weights used for the dive. The
message in the blue box at the top of the panel:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -1365,7 +1378,7 @@ message in the blue box at the top of the panel:</p></div>
<img src="images/BlueEditBar_f22.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Blue edit bar" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>shows the dive is being edited. This is a highly interactive part of
+<div class="paragraph"><p>shows the equipment is being edited. This is a highly interactive part of
<em>Subsurface</em> and the information on
cylinders and gases (entered here) determines the behavior of the <strong>Dive profile</strong>
(top right-hand panel).</p></div>
@@ -1379,8 +1392,8 @@ like this:</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>For hand-entered dives, this information needs to be typed in. For dive computers,
<em>Subsurface</em> often gets the gas used from the dive computer and
automatically inserts the gas composition(% oxygen or % helium) in the table. The + button
-at the top right lets you add more cylinders for this dive. The dark
-dust bin icon on the left lets you delete information for a cylinder.
+at the top right allows adding more cylinders for this dive. The dark
+dustbin icon on the left allows you to delete information for a cylinder.
Note that it is not possible to delete a cylinder if it is used during the
dive. A cylinder might be implicitly used in the dive, even without a gas change event.
Start by selecting a cylinder type on the left-hand side of the
@@ -1401,14 +1414,14 @@ automatically be shown in the dialogue.</p></div>
specified gas during the dive. The unit of pressure (metric/imperial)
corresponds to the settings chosen in the <em>Preferences</em>.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Finally, provide the gas mixture used. If air was used, the
-value of 21% can be entered or this field can be left blank. If nitrox or
+value of 21% can be entered into the oxygen box or this field can be left blank. If nitrox or
trimix were used, their percentages of oxygen and/or helium should be entered.
Any inappropriate fields should be left empty. After typing the
information for the cylinder, save the data
either by pressing <em>ENTER</em> on the keyboard or by clicking outside the cell
containing
-the cursor. Information for any additional cylinders can be added by using the<br />
-button at the top right hand. The following is an example of a complete description
+the cursor. Information for any additional cylinders can be added by using the + button
+at the top right hand. Here is an example of a complete description
for a dive using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
@@ -1416,8 +1429,7 @@ for a dive using two cylinders (air and EAN50):</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Weights</strong>: Information about the weight system used can be entered
-using a dialogue similar to that of the cylinder information. If you
-click
+using a dialogue similar to that of the cylinder information. If you click
the + button on the top right of the weights dialogue, the table looks like
this:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -1433,7 +1445,7 @@ down-arrow:</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This can be used to select the type of weight system
-used during the dive or just may start typing in the box
+used during the dive. You may start typing in the box
to specify a different weighting mechanism that will be saved by <em>Subsurface</em>.
In the <strong>Weight</strong>
field, type in the amount of weight used during the dive. After
@@ -1537,37 +1549,36 @@ the new data should now be saved permanently on the computer disk.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="_importing_dive_information_from_other_digital_data_sources_or_other_data_formats">5.3. Importing dive information from other digital data sources or other data formats</h3>
-<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>If you’ve been diving for some time, it’s possible several dives were
-logged using other dive log software. These dive logs can probably be
-imported into <em>Subsurface</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> will import dive logs from a range of
-other
-dive log software. While some software is supported natively, for
-others you will need to
-export the logbook(s) to an intermediate format so they can then be imported
-by <em>Subsurface</em>.
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>Many divers log their dives using the proprietary software provided by the
+manufacturers of their dive computers. <em>Subsurface</em> can import dive logs from a range of
+other dive log software. While import from some software is supported natively,
+others require
+export of the the dive log to an intermediate format that can then be imported
+into <em>Subsurface</em>.
Currently, <em>Subsurface</em> supports importing CSV log files from several sources.
-APD LogViewer, XP5, Sensus and Seabear files are
+Dive log import from APD LogViewer, XP5, Sensus and Seabear files are
preconfigured, but because the import is flexible, users can configure their own
imports.
Manually kept log files (e.g. a spreadsheet) can also be imported by
configuring the CSV import.
<em>Subsurface</em> can also import UDDF and UDCF files used by some dive log
software and some dive computers, like the Heinrichs &amp; Weikamp DR5. Finally,
-for some dive log software like Mares Dive Organizer we currently recommend you
-import the logbooks first into a web service like <em>divelogs.de</em> and then import
+for some dive log software like Mares Dive Organizer we currently recommend
+importing the logbook first into a web service like <em>divelogs.de</em> and then import
from there with
<em>Subsurface</em>. Divelogs.de supports a few additional logbook formats that
<em>Subsurface</em> currently cannot handle.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If the format of other software is supported natively on Subsurface, select
either <em>Import &#8594; Import log files</em> or <em>File &#8594; Open log file</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> supports the data formats
-of many dive computers, including Suunto and Shearwater. When importing dives, <em>Subsurface</em>
+of many dive computers, including Suunto, Shearwater and some CCR equipment. When importing dives, <em>Subsurface</em>
tries to detect multiple records for
the same dive and merges the information as best as it can. If
there are no time zone issues (or other reasons that would cause the
beginning time of the dives to be significantly different) <em>Subsurface</em>
will not create duplicate entries. Below is more specific information
-to import data to <em>Subsurface</em>.
-==== Using the universal import dialogue</p></div>
+to import data to <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_using_the_universal_import_dialogue">5.3.1. Using the universal import dialogue</h4>
<div class="paragraph" id="Unified_import"><p>Importing dives from other software is done through a universal interface
activated by selecting <em>Import</em> from the Main Menu, then clicking on
<em>Import Log Files</em>. This brings up dialogue <strong>A</strong>, below.</p></div>
@@ -1617,7 +1628,7 @@ LiquiVision logs
</li>
<li>
<p>
-divelog.de logs
+divelogs.de logs
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1632,7 +1643,7 @@ JDiveLog
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Suunto Dive Manager (DM3 and DM4)
+Suunto Dive Manager (DM3, DM4, DM5)
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1645,8 +1656,9 @@ CSV (text-based and spreadsheet-based) dive logs, including APD CCR logs
containing the file list on the right of the dialogue, opens
the imported dive log in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive List</strong>. Some other formats not
accessible through the Import dialogue are also supported, as explained below.</p></div>
+</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importing_from_ostctools">5.3.1. Importing from OSTCTools</h4>
+<h4 id="_importing_from_ostctools">5.3.2. Importing from OSTCTools</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>OSTC Tools</em> is a Microsoft-based suite of dive download and dive management tools for the OSTC
family of dive computers. <em>OSTC Tools</em> downloads dive data from the dive computer and stores it
as a binary file with file extension <em>.dive</em> . Subsurface can directly import these files when using
@@ -1657,13 +1669,13 @@ panel. Select one or more dive, then click the <em>Open</em> button. The OSTC di
<div class="paragraph"><p>All H&amp;W devices supported by OSTCTools can be imported to <em>Subsurface</em>. This includes
OSTC, OSTC Mk2, OSTC 2N/2C, OSTC3, OSTC Sport, and probably although untested, Frog, OSTC2 and
OSTC CR.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Please remember that OSTCTools is <strong>not</strong> a true diving log software, but rather a useful set of tools
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Please remember that OSTCTools is <strong>not</strong> true diving log software, but rather a useful set of tools
for analysis and management of OSTC devices. Only raw dive computer data will be
-imported to <em>Subsurface</em>; you have to manually complete the rest of the
-data you want (buddies, equipment, notes, etc).</p></div>
+imported to <em>Subsurface</em>; the rest of the
+data (buddies, equipment, notes, etc) need to be completed manually.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importing_from_mares_dive_organizer_v2_1">5.3.2. Importing from Mares Dive Organizer V2.1</h4>
+<h4 id="_importing_from_mares_dive_organizer_v2_1">5.3.3. Importing from Mares Dive Organizer V2.1</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Since Mares uses proprietary Windows software not compatible with
multi-platform applications, these dive logs cannot be
directly imported into
@@ -1680,9 +1692,9 @@ Export the dive log data from Mares Dive Organizer to your
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Data should then be imported into <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. You will first need to create a user
+Data should then be imported into <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. First, create a user
account in
- <em>www.divelogs.de</em>. Log into that web site, then
+ <em>www.divelogs.de</em> and Log into that web site, then
select <em>Import Logbook &#8594; Dive Organizer from the menu on the left hand side.
The instructions must be carefully followed to transfer the dive information
(in _.sdf</em> format) from the Dive Organizer database to <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.
@@ -1697,7 +1709,7 @@ Finally, import the dives
</ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">5.3.3. Importing dives from <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4>
+<h4 id="S_ImportingDivelogsDe">5.3.4. Importing dives from <strong>divelogs.de</strong></h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Importing dive information from <em>divelogs.de</em> is simple, using a single
dialogue box. The <em>Import &#8594; Import from Divelogs.de</em> option should be selected
from the Main Menu. This
@@ -1716,7 +1728,7 @@ success status is shown (see image <strong>B</strong>, below). The
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVData">5.3.4. Importing data in CSV format</h4>
+<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVData">5.3.5. Importing data in CSV format</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>A comma-separated file (.csv) can be used to import dive information either as dive profiles
(as in the case of the APD Inspiration and Evolution closed circuit rebreathers) or as dive
metadata (in case the user keeps dive data in a spreadsheet). The <em>CSV</em> format is a universal
@@ -1728,9 +1740,12 @@ to CSV format</a> for information that may be helpful for importing spreadsheet-
into <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
<div class="sect4">
<h5 id="S_ImportingCSVDives">Importing dives in CSV format from dive computers or other dive log software</h5>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>You can view a <em>CSV</em> file by using an ordinary text editor. It’s normally organized into
-a single line that provides the headers (or <em>field names</em> or <em>column headings</em>) of the data
-columns, followed by the data, one record per line.</p></div>
+<div class="literalblock">
+<div class="content">
+<pre><code> _CSV_ files can be viewed using an ordinary text editor. A _CSV_ file is normally organized into
+a single line that provides the headers (or _field names_ or _column headings_) of the data
+columns, followed by the data, one record per line.</code></pre>
+</div></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>There are two types of <em>CSV</em> dive logs that can be imported into <em>Subsurface</em>:</p></div>
<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
@@ -1755,7 +1770,7 @@ columns, followed by the data, one record per line.</p></div>
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Before being able to import the <em>CSV</em> data to <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>you needs to know a few
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Before being able to import the <em>CSV</em> data to <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>you need to know a few
things about the data being imported</strong>:</p></div>
<div class="olist loweralpha"><ol class="loweralpha">
<li>
@@ -1801,7 +1816,7 @@ option. The configuration panel also has dropdown lists for the specification of
field separator (Tab, comma or semicolon), the date format used in the <em>CSV</em> file,
the time units (seconds, minutes or minutes:seconds), as well as the unit system
(metric or imperial). Selecting the appropriate options among these is critical for
-the successful data import.</p></div>
+successful data import.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Complete this by ensuring that all the data columns have the appropriate
column headings. The top blue row of the data table contains the column
headings found in the <em>CSV</em> data file. The blue row of balloons immediately above these
@@ -1809,9 +1824,9 @@ contains the names understood by <em>Subsurface</em>. These balloons can be move
instance, <em>Subsurface</em> expects the column heading for Dive number (" # ") to be "Dive # ". If
the column heading that <em>Subsurface</em> expects is not in the blue row, drag the
appropriate balloon from the upper area and drop it in the appropriate blue
-cell at the top of the table. To indicate the correct column for "Dive #", drag
+cell at the top of the table. For example, to indicate the correct column for "Dive #", drag
the ballooned item labelled "Dive # " and drop it in the blue
-cell immediately above the white cell containing " # ". This is depicted in
+cell immediately above the white cell containing " # ", depicted in
the image below.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
@@ -1831,7 +1846,7 @@ The data from the <em>CSV</em> file are imported and shown in the <strong>Dive L
<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
</td>
<td class="content"><em>CSV</em> is an abbreviation for a data file format: <em>Comma-Separated Values</em>. It is a
-file format that lets you view or edit information using a text editor like
+file format that allows you to view or edit information using a text editor like
Notepad (Windows), gedit (Linux) or TextWrangler (OS/X). There are two main advantages of
the <em>CSV</em> format. First, the data are easily editable as text without any proprietary software.
Second, all information is human-readable, not obscured by any custom or
@@ -1869,7 +1884,7 @@ Wismar Baltic 2012-12-01 10:13 35:27 15.4 Dieter Albrecht
Pulau Weh 2012-12-20 09:46 55:56 38.6 Karaeng Bontonompo</code></pre>
</div></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>It is clear why many people prefer the TAB-delimited format to the comma-delimited format. The
-disadvantage is that one cannot see
+disadvantage is that you cannot see
the TAB characters. For instance, the space between <em>Dive</em> and <em>date</em> in the top line may be
a SPACE character or a TAB character (in this case it is a SPACE character: the tabs are before and
after <em>Dive date</em>). If the field names in the first line are long, the alignment with data in the other lines
@@ -1913,7 +1928,131 @@ a smaller file to make sure everything works.</td>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Companion">5.4. Importing GPS coordinates with the <em>Subsurface Companion App</em> for mobile phones</h3>
+<h3 id="_importing_dive_coordinates_from_a_mobile_device_with_gps">5.4. Importing Dive coordinates from a mobile device with GPS.</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A smartphone with built-in GPS facilities can be used to store the locations of dives.
+This is performed by:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>1) Taking the mobile device along on the dive boat / liveabord while
+automatically collecting dive site coordinate information.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>2) Uploading the coordinates from the mobile device to the <em>Subsurface</em> Internet server.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>3) Syncronising the dives in the <em>Subsurface</em> dive list with the coordinates stored
+on the <em>Subsurface</em> Internet server.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>_Subsurface has two tools for achieving this:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The <em>Subsurface Companion App</em> (Android and iOS).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> app (Android and iOS)
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Both of these applications perform the collection of dive site coordinates and
+the synchronisation with dives in the <em>Subsurface</em> dive list. However, the Companion App
+is not being further developed and has largely been replaced by the <em>Subsurface-mobile</em>
+app. While the <em>Companion app</em> serves exclusively to collect dive site coordinates and
+to make these available to the <em>Subsurface</em> desktop version, <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> performs
+many of the functions of the desktop version, including the management and viewing of dive
+information. Below, we describe how to perform the above three steps using each of the two
+mobile apps.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>For information on using the <em>Subsurface Companion App</em>, click <a href="#S_iCompanion"><em>here</em></a>.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_storing_and_and_using_gps_locations_using_em_subsurface_mobile_em">5.4.1. Storing and and using GPS locations using <em>Subsurface-mobile</em></h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_install_em_subsurface_mobile_em">Install <em>Subsurface-mobile</em></h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Find <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> on Google Play and install it on an Android device. The app
+is free. The iOS version is currently experimental. <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> has an extensive
+<a href="https://subsurface-divelog.org/documentation/subsurface-mobile-user-manual">user manual</a>
+accessible from within that app.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_create_a_em_subsurface_mobile_em_account">Create a <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> account</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This topic is discussed at length in the <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> user manual. In the
+Credentials screen of <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> provide an e-mail address and a user
+password that enables subsequent access. A PIN number is e-mailed from the
+<em>Subsurface</em> Internet server to the e-mail address that has been provided.
+Type the PIN into the appropriate text field in the Credentials screen (see image below).
+The <em>Subsurface</em> Internet server notifies the user that a new user has been registered.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>N.B.:</strong> To successfully create a user account, the mobile device must have Internet connectivity,
+either through the cellular network or via wifi.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/MobileCredentials.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Subsurface-mobile, credentials screen" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_configure_auto_collecting_of_gps_coordinates">Configure auto-collecting of GPS coordinates</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Activate the main menu of <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> by selecting the "hamburger" menu button
+at the bottom left of the <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> screen (see image above), then select
+<em>GPS</em> &#8594; <em>Preferences</em> (see image below). The collection of GPS locations is done in the background and
+automatically, using two settings:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Time threshold.</em> (minutes). The app will try to get a location every X minutes
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Distance threshold.</em> (meters). Minimum distance between two locations.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>How are GPS coordinates collected?</strong> Assuming the diver sets 5 minutes and 50
+meters in the settings above, the app will start by recording a location at the current
+location, followed by another one at every 5 minutes <strong>or</strong> every time you move 50 m
+from previous location, whichever happens first.
+If subsequent locations are within a radius of 50 meters from the previous one,
+a new location is not saved. If the diver is not moving, only one location is
+saved, at least until the <em>Time-threshold</em> period has elapsed.
+If the diver moves, a trace of the route is obtained by saving a location every 50 meters.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_activate_the_automated_recording_of_gps_locations">Activate the automated recording of GPS locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> main menu has a checkbox at the bottom left labled
+<em>Run location service</em> (see image below). Checking the box starts the automated recording
+of GPS positions.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/MobileMenu.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Subsurface-mobile main menu" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_after_the_dive_stop_the_automated_recording_of_gps_locations">After the dive, stop the automated recording of GPS locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Uncheck the check box at the bottom left of the <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> main menu.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_upload_the_gps_locations_onto_the_em_subsurface_em_internet_server">Upload the GPS locations onto the <em>Subsurface</em> Internet server.</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>N.B.:</strong> Uploading the GPS locations to the Internet can only take place if the mobile
+device has reliable access to the Internet, either via a cellular network or
+via a wifi connection. If the Internet is not accessible from the dive site(s),
+then GPS uploading can only take place after the dive or after the dive trip,
+when an Internet connection has been re-established.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>From the <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> main menu, select <em>GPS</em> &#8594; <em>Upload GPS data</em>. The
+locations are uploaded. Check the indicator at the top of the mobile screen for
+internet activity, indicating the transfer of information.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_apply_the_stored_gps_locations_to_dives_on_the_em_subsurface_em_dive_list">Apply the stored GPS locations to dives on the <em>Subsurface</em> dive list.</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> collects the first GPS location recorded after the start of a dive
+(obtained within <em>Subsurface</em> from either the dive computer or from the
+manually-entered dive information) and before the end of a dive. These
+coordinates are shown in the <em>Coordinates</em> field of the dive site panel
+for each dive. Within the dive site panel, provide a name for the
+coordinates that have been assigned to the dive, following the instructions
+under the heading above <a href="#S_locations"><em>Location</em> management</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The <a href="https://subsurface-divelog.org/documentation/subsurface-mobile-user-manual">user manual for <em>Subsurface-mobile</em></a> (accessible from within that app)
+contains detailed instructions for
+performing the collection of GPS data and for managing, uploading and
+synchronising this information.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_iCompanion">5.4.2. Importing GPS coordinates with the <em>Subsurface Companion App</em> for mobile phones</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Using the <strong>Subsurface Companion App</strong> on an <em>Android device</em> or
<a href="#S_iphone"><em>iPhone</em></a> with GPS, the coordinates
for the diving
@@ -1921,14 +2060,14 @@ location can be automatically passed to the <em>Subsurface</em> dive log. The Co
stores dive locations on a dedicated Internet server. <em>Subsurface</em> can collect
the locations from the server.
To do this:</p></div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_create_a_companion_app_account">5.4.1. Create a Companion App account</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_create_a_companion_app_account">Create a Companion App account</h5>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
Register on the <a href="http://api.hohndel.org/login/"><em>Subsurface companion web page</em></a>.
A confirmation email with instructions and a personal <strong>DIVERID</strong> will be sent,
- a long number giving you access to the file server and Companion App capabilities.
+ a long number enabling access to the file server and Companion App capabilities.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1941,8 +2080,8 @@ Download the app from
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_using_the_subsurface_companion_app_on_an_android_smartphone">5.4.2. Using the Subsurface companion app on an Android smartphone</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_using_the_subsurface_companion_app_on_an_android_smartphone">Using the Subsurface companion app on an Android smartphone</h5>
<div class="paragraph"><p>On first use the app has three options:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
@@ -1956,13 +2095,13 @@ Download the app from
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Retrieve an account.</em> If users forget their <strong>DIVERID</strong> they will receive an email
- to recover the number.
+<em>Retrieve an account.</em> If you forget your <strong>DIVERID</strong> you will receive an email
+ to recover the ID string.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Use an existing account.</em> Users are prompted for their <strong>DIVERID</strong>. The app saves
+<em>Use an existing account.</em> You are prompted for your <strong>DIVERID</strong>. The app saves
this <strong>DIVERID</strong> and doesn’t ask for it again unless you use the <em>Disconnect</em> menu
option (see below).
</p>
@@ -1980,29 +2119,28 @@ in <em>Subsurface</em> itself.
This helps synchronization between <em>Subsurface</em> and the Companion App.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_creating_new_dive_locations">Creating new dive locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Creating new dive locations</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Now you are ready to get a dive position and
send it to the server. The Android
-display will look like the left hand image (<strong>A</strong>) below, but without any dives.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Touch the "+" icon on the top right to add a new dive site, a menu
-shows with 3 options:</p></div>
+display looks like the left hand image (<strong>A</strong>) below, but without any dives.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Touch the + icon at the top right to add a new dive site. A menu
+with 3 options shows:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Current: A prompt for a place name (or a request to activate the GPS if it is turned
- off) will be displayed, after which the current location is saved.
+Current: A prompt for a place name is shown (or a request to activate the GPS if it is turned
+ off), after which the current location is saved.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Use Map: This option lets you fix a position by searching a world map. A
- world map is shown (see <strong>B</strong> below) on which you can show the desired position
+Use Map: This option allows you to fix a position by searching a world map. A
+ world map is shown (see <strong>B</strong> below). Specify the desired position
with a <em>long press</em> on the touch
sensitive screen (if the marked location is wrong, simply choose a new location)
- and select the check symbol in the upper right. A dialog is shown letting you enter the
+ and select the check symbol in the upper right. A dialog is shown allowing you to enter the
name of the dive location and the date and time of the dive (see <strong>C</strong> below). In order to import this
- dive location in <em>Subsurface</em> you should set the time to agree with the time of
+ dive location in <em>Subsurface</em>, set the time to agree with the time of
that dive on the dive computer.
</p>
</li>
@@ -2015,17 +2153,14 @@ Use Map: This option lets you fix a position by searching a world map. A
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Import local GPX file: The android device searches for .gpx files and located
- archives will be shown. The selected .gpx file is opened and the stored
+Import local GPX file: The Android device searches for .gpx files and located
+ archives will be shown. The selected .gpx file is opened and its
locations shown. Now select the appropriate locations, then select the
- tab in the upper right, after which the locations will be sent to the web service
- and added to the list on the Android device.
+ tab in the upper right, afterAndroid device.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_dive_lists_of_dive_locations">Dive lists of dive locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Dive lists of dive locations</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The main screen shows a list of dive locations, each with a name, date and
time (see <strong>A</strong> below). Some locations may have an arrow-up icon over the selection box to the left
showing they need to be uploaded to the server. You
@@ -2036,7 +2171,7 @@ are performed on several selected locations.</p></div>
map showing them. The display mode (List or Map) is changed by
selecting <em>Dives</em> at the top left of the screen (see <strong>A</strong> below) and then selecting
the display mode. The display mode can be changed either from the list
-of locations or from the map (see <strong>B</strong> below). If you select a location (on the list
+of locations or from the map (see <strong>B</strong> below). Upon selecting a location (on the list
or on the map), an editing
panel opens (see <strong>C</strong> below) where the dive description or other details may be changed.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -2044,8 +2179,8 @@ panel opens (see <strong>C</strong> below) where the dive description or other d
<img src="images/Companion_4.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Companion App, add location using map" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>When you select a dive (<strong>not</strong> selecting the check box), the
-name given to it, date/time and GPS coordinates will be shown, with two options at the top
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Upon selecting a dive (<strong>not</strong> selecting the check box), the
+name given to it, date/time and GPS coordinates are shown with two options at the top
of the screen:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
@@ -2062,9 +2197,7 @@ service, as explained below.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_uploading_dive_locations">Uploading dive locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Uploading dive locations</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several ways to send locations to the server.
The easiest is simply
selecting the locations (See <strong>A</strong> below) and then touching the right arrow at the
@@ -2085,13 +2218,9 @@ it deletes the selected dive location(s).</td>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>After a dive trip using the Companion App, all dive locations are ready to be
downloaded to a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log (see below).</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_settings_on_the_companion_app">Settings on the Companion App</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Settings on the Companion App</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Selecting the <em>Settings</em> menu option results in the right hand image above (<strong>B</strong>).</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_server_and_account">Server and account</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Server and account</em></p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -2102,9 +2231,11 @@ downloaded to a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log (see below).</p></div>
<p>
<em>User ID.</em> The DIVERID obtained by registering as described above. The easiest way to
get it is to copy and paste from the confirmation email or just type it in.
-===== Synchronisation
</p>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Synchronisation</em></p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
<em>Synchronize on startup</em>. If selected, dive locations in the Android device and those
@@ -2118,11 +2249,9 @@ downloaded to a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log (see below).</p></div>
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_background_service">Background service</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Background service</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Instead of entering an unique dive location, you can leave the service running
-in the background of your Android device, allowing a continuous collection of GPS locations.</p></div>
+in the background, allowing a continuous collection of GPS locations.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The settings below define the behavior of the service:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
@@ -2157,9 +2286,7 @@ If the diver is moving, a trace of the route is obtained by saving a
location every 50 meters.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_other">Other</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Other</em></p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -2178,31 +2305,22 @@ Subsurface mailing list.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_search">Search</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Search</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Search the saved dive locations by name or by date and time.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_start_service">Start service</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Start service</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Starts the <em>background service</em> following the previously defined settings.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_disconnect">Disconnect</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Disconnect</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This is admittedly a badly named option that disconnects the app from the server.
It resets the user ID in the app, showing the first screen where an account
can be created, retrieve the ID for an existing account or use the users own
-ID. The disconnect option
-is useful if your Android device was used to download the dive locations
+ID. The <em>Disconnect</em> option
+is useful if the Android device was used to download the dive locations
of another registered diver.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_send_all_locations">Send all locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Send all locations</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This option sends all locations stored in the Android device to the server.</p></div>
</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_iphone">5.4.3. Using the Subsurface companion app on an <em>iPhone</em> to record dive locations</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="S_iphone">Using the Subsurface companion app on an <em>iPhone</em> to record dive locations</h5>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The iPhone interface is quite simple. Type the user ID (obtained
during registration) into the space reserved for it, then select "Dive in"
(see left part of the image below) and start collecting dive location information.</p></div>
@@ -2223,11 +2341,9 @@ service is running you can only add dives manually.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>You can edit the site name afterwards by selecting the dive
from the dive list and clicking on the site name. There are no other
editable fields. The dive list is automatically uploaded from the iPhone
-to the web service. There isn’t an option to
+to the web service. There is no option to
trigger upload manually.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_downloading_dive_locations_to_the_em_subsurface_em_divelog">5.4.4. Downloading dive locations to the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Downloading dive locations to the <em>Subsurface</em> divelog</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Download dive(s) from a dive computer or enter them manually into
<em>Subsurface</em> before obtaining the GPS coordinates from the server. The download
dialog can be reached via <em>Ctrl+G</em> or from the <em>Subsurface</em> Main Menu <em>Import
@@ -2240,18 +2356,18 @@ which the screen on the right (<strong>B</strong>) below appears:</p></div>
<img src="images/DownloadGPS.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Downloading Companion app GPS data" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Note that the <em>Apply</em> button is now active. By clicking on it, you can update the locations
-of the newly entered or uploaded dives in <em>Subsurface</em>. That applies the
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Note that the <em>Apply</em> button is now active: selecting it updates the locations
+of the newly entered or uploaded dives in <em>Subsurface</em>, i.e. it applies the
coordinates and names entered on the app to all the new dives that match the
-date-times of the uploaded GPS localities. If you have entered the name of the dive
-location in <em>Subsurface</em> before downloading the GPS coordinates, this name will take
-precedence over downloaded one.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Since <em>Subsurface</em> matches GPS locations from the Android device and dive information from the
+date-times of the uploaded GPS localities. The names of dive
+locations entered within <em>Subsurface</em> (i.e. before downloading the GPS coordinates) have
+precedence over downloaded dive locations.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Since <em>Subsurface</em> matches GPS locations from the mobile device and dive information from the
dive computer based on date-time data, automatic assignment of GPS data to dives depends
on agreeing date-time information between the two devices. Although <em>Subsurface</em> has
-a wide range tolerance, it may not be able to identify the appropriate dive if there&#8217;s
-a large difference between the time in the dive computer and that of the Android device.
-That results in no updates.</p></div>
+a wide range tolerance, it may not be able to identify the appropriate dive if there is a
+large difference between the time in the dive computer and that of the Android device.
+This results in no updates.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Similar date-times may not always be possible and there may be many reasons for this (e.g. time zones).
<em>Subsurface</em> may also be unable to decide which is the correct position for a dive (e.g. on repetitive
dives while running <em>background service</em> there may be several locations that would be
@@ -2273,14 +2389,14 @@ downloading GPS data.</p></div>
<em>Background service</em> may fill the location list with
unnecessary locations that don’t correspond to the exact dive point but do correspond to the boat&#8217;s route.
Right now, these locations are difficult to delete from the server. In some situations it
- is better to clean up the list on the Android device before sending the dive points to the web
+ is better to clean up the list on the mobile device before sending the dive points to the web
server by simply deleting the inappropriate locations. This might be necessary, for
- instance, if you want to keep the location list clear to see dives in the web service map display (see above).
+ instance, to keep the location list clear to see dives in the web service map display (see above).
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-It may also make sense to give informative names to the locations sent to the web server, or at least
+It may also be useful to give informative names to the locations sent to the web server, or at least
to use an informative name in the <em>Name Template</em> setting while running the <em>background service</em>,
especially on a dive trip with many dives and dive locations.
</p>
@@ -2288,36 +2404,31 @@ It may also make sense to give informative names to the locations sent to the we
</ul></div>
</div>
</div>
+</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="S_LoadImage">5.5. Adding photographs to dives</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Many (if not most) divers take a camera with them and take photographs
-during a dive. To match each photograph with a specific
-dive, <em>Subsurface</em> lets you load photos into a dive. Photos are superimposed
-on the dive profile, from where they can be viewed.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Many (if not most) divers take photographs
+during a dive. <em>Subsurface</em> allows the storage and display of photographs for each dive. Photos are
+superimposed on the dive profile at the times during the dive when they were taken. They can also be viewed
+from the dive profile.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="_loading_photos_and_synchronizing_between_dive_computer_and_camera">5.5.1. Loading photos and synchronizing between dive computer and camera</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Left-lick on a dive or on a group of dives on the dive list. Then right-click on this
-dive or group of dives and choose the option <em>Load Images</em>:</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The system file browser appears. Select the folder and photographs that need
-to be loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> and click the <em>Open</em> button.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Left-lick on a dive or on a group of dives on the dive list, bringing up the <a href="#S_DiveListContextMenu">Dive list context Menu</a>. Right-click the appropriate
+option to import images either from
+file or from the Internet. The system file browser appears. Select the folder and
+photographs that need to be loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> and click the <em>Open</em> button.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/LoadImage2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Load images option" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>This brings up the time synchronization dialog, shown below. But be
-aware that the time
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This brings up the time synchronization dialog, shown below. The time
synchronization is not perfect between the dive computer used during a dive,
and the camera used during that same dive. These two devices
-often differ by several minutes. If <em>Subsurface</em> can synchronize,
-then the exact times of photographs can be used to position photographs on
+often differ by several minutes. <em>Subsurface</em> attempts to synchronize these two devices
+so that the exact times of photographs can be used to position photographs on
the dive profile.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> synchronizes in three ways:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> synchronizes camera with dive computer in three ways:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -2327,15 +2438,15 @@ the dive profile.</p></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Manually</strong>: If you wrote down the exact camera time at the start of a dive, the
- difference in time between the two devices can be determined. As long as the device
- settings for time has not been changed in either device, you could write down the times of
- both devices after the dive or even at the end of the day. You can then manually set the time
- difference in the <em>Time shift</em> dialog. Towards the top of the dialog is a time setting tool
- immediately under the heading <em>Shift times of image(s) by</em>, shown in figure <strong>A</strong> below.
+<strong>Manually</strong>: Writing down the exact camera time at the start of a dive allows using the
+ difference in time between the two devices. As long as the device
+ settings for time has not been changed in either device, the times of
+ both devices after the dive or even at the end of the day allows manually setting the time
+ difference in the <em>Time shift</em> dialog (see image below). Towards the top of the dialog is a time
+ setting tool immediately under the heading <em>Shift times of image(s) by</em>, in the image below.
If the camera time is 7 minutes later than that of the dive computer, set the time setting
- tool to a value of 00:07. Select either the <em>earlier</em> or <em>later</em> radio button.
- In the above example, the <em>earlier</em> option is appropriate, since the photos need to be shifted
+ tool to a value of 00:07 and select the <em>Earlier</em> radio button.
+ This is appropriate, since the photos need to be shifted
7 minutes earlier (camera is 7 minutes ahead of dive computer). Ignore any "AM" or "PM" suffix
in that tool. Click the <em>OK</em> button and synchronization is done.
</p>
@@ -2343,32 +2454,37 @@ the dive profile.</p></div>
</ul></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage3b_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Synchronization dialog" />
+<img src="images/LoadImage3b_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Synchronization dialog" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>By photograph</strong>: There is a very slick way of synchronizing. If you take a
- photograph of the face of the dive computer showing the time, then <em>Subsurface</em> can get
+<strong>By photograph</strong>: There is a very slick way of achieving synchronization, requiring a
+ photograph of the face of the dive computer showing the time. <em>Subsurface</em> gets
the exact time the photograph was taken, using the metadata the camera stores within
- each photo. To do this, use the bottom half of the <em>Time shift</em> dialog. If you use
- the bottom part, the top part of the dialog is ignored. Click on
- the horizontal bar called "<em>Select image of dive computer showing time</em>. This brings up
- a file browser letting you select the photograph of the dive computer time. Select the
+ each photo and compares this with the time visible on the photo. To do this, use the
+ bottom half of the <em>Time shift</em> dialog. In this case the top part of the dialog is ignored. Click on
+ the horizontal bar called <em>Select image of dive computer showing time</em>. This brings up
+ a file browser for selecting the photograph of the dive computer time. Select the
photograph using the file browser and click on <em>OK</em>. This photograph of the dive computer
appears in the bottom panel of the <em>Shift times</em> dialog. Now <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly
- when the photograph has been taken. Now set the date-time dialog to the left of the photo
+ when the photograph was taken. Now set the date-time dialog to the left of the photo
so it reflects the date and time of the dive computer in the photo. When the
date-time tool has been set, <em>Subsurface</em> knows exactly what the time difference between
- camera and dive computer is, and it can synchronize.
- Image <strong>B</strong> above shows a photograph of the face of the dive computer and with the date-time tool set to the
+ camera and dive computer is, and it can synchronize the devices. The image below shows
+ a photograph of the face of the dive computer and with the date-time tool set to the
date-time.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage3c_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Synchronization dialog" />
+</div>
+</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If the timestamp of a photograph is more than 30 minutes before or after the dive, it is not placed on
-the dive profile.</p></div>
+the dive profile (see the red warning in the image above). However, If the appropriate checkbox is selected (see image above) these images can still be placed on the <em>Photos</em> tab of the <strong>Notes</strong> panel so that all photos associated with a dive are visible, including photos taken before or after the dive.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="_viewing_the_photos">5.5.2. Viewing the photos</h4>
@@ -2376,7 +2492,7 @@ the dive profile.</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-the <em>Photos</em> tab of the <strong>Notes</strong> panel.
+the <em>Photos</em> tab of the <strong>Notes</strong> panel (left part of image below).
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2399,7 +2515,7 @@ as tiny icons (stubs) on the dive profile at the appropriate positions reflectin
<img src="images/LoadImage4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Photos on dive profile" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>If you hover the mouse over any of the photo icons, a thumbnail photo
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Hover the mouse over any of the photo stubs. A thumbnail photo
is shown of the appropriate photo. See the image below:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
@@ -2407,8 +2523,8 @@ is shown of the appropriate photo. See the image below:</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Clicking on the thumbnail brings up a full size
-photo overlaid on the <em>Subsurface</em> window. This allows good viewing of
-the added photographs. (see the image below). Note that the thumbnail
+photo overlaid on the <em>Subsurface</em> window, allowing a good view of
+the photographs (see the image below). <strong>Note</strong> that the thumbnail
has a small dustbin icon in the bottom right hand corner (see image above). Selecting
the dustbin removes the image from the dive. Be careful
when clicking on a thumbnail. Images
@@ -2425,9 +2541,8 @@ can also be deleted using the <em>Photos</em> tab (see text below).</p></div>
panel. Photos taken in rapid succession during a dive (therefore sometimes with large
overlap on the dive profile) can easily be accessed in the <em>Photos</em> tab. This tab serves as
a tool for individually accessing the photos of a dive, while the stubs on the dive profile
-show when during a dive a photo was taken. By single-clicking on a thumbnail in
-the <em>Photos</em> panel, a photo is selected. By double-clicking a thumbnail, the full-sized image is
-shown, overlaying the <em>Subsurface</em> window. A photo can be deleted from the <em>Photos</em> panel by selecting
+show when during a dive a photo was taken. Single-click a thumbnail in
+the <em>Photos</em> panel to select a photo. Double-click a thumbnail to view the full-sized image, overlaying the <em>Subsurface</em> window. Deleted a photo from the <em>Photos</em> panel by selecting
it (single-click) and then by pressing the <em>Del</em> key on the keyboard. This removes the photo BOTH
from the <em>Photos</em> tab as well as the dive profile.</p></div>
</div>
@@ -2438,29 +2553,27 @@ from the <em>Photos</em> tab as well as the dive profile.</p></div>
between <em>Subsurface</em> and an external repository of photos. When associating a dive profile with photos from an
external drive, the normal procedure of selection and synchronization (see text above) is used.
After the external drive has been disconnected, <em>Subsurface</em> cannot access these photos any more.
-If the display of photos is activated (using the toolbox to the left of the <em>Dive Profile</em>), the
-program only shows a small white dot where each photo should be on the dive profile.
-In addition the <em>Photos</em> tab only shows the file names of the photos.
+If the display of photos is activated (using the toolbox icon to the left of the <em>Dive Profile</em>), the
+program shows a small white dot where each photo should be on the dive profile.
+In addition the <em>Photos</em> tab shows only the file names of the photos.
If the external drive with the photos is re-connected, the photos can be seen in the normal way.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="S_FindMovedImages">5.5.5. Moving photographs among directories, hard disks or computers</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>After a photograph has been loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> and associated with a specific dive, the directory
- where the photo lies is stored, letting <em>Subsurface</em> find the photograph when the dive is
- opened again. If the photo or the whole photo collection is moved to another drive or to a different
- machine, the directory structure will be different to that of the original uploaded
- photo. When this happens, <em>Subsurface</em> looks for the photos at their original location before they were moved,
- cannot find them and cannot display them. Because after moving photos, large numbers of photos
- may need to be deleted and re-imported from the new location, <em>Subsurface</em> has a mechanism that eases the
- process of updating the directory information for each photo: automatic updates using fingerprints.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>After a photograph has been loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> and associated with a specific dive,
+<em>Subsurface</em> saves the directory path where the photo lies as well as the file name of the photo,
+in order to find it when the dive is opened again.
+If the photo or the whole photo collection is moved to another drive or to a different
+ machine, the path to the photo changes. Now, <em>Subsurface</em> looks for the photos at their original location before they were moved,
+ cannot find them and cannot display them. Because, after moving photos, large numbers of photos
+ may need to be deleted and re-imported from the new location, <em>Subsurface</em> has a mechanism to ease this inconvenience: automatic updates using fingerprints.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>When a photo is loaded into <em>Subsurface</em>, a fingerprint for the image is calculated and stored with the
other reference information for that photo. After moving a photo collection (that has already been loaded
into <em>Subsurface</em>) to a different directory, disk or computer, <em>Subsurface</em> can:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-look through a particular directory (and all its subdirectories recursively) where photos have been moved
-to,
+look through a particular directory (and all its subdirectories recursively) where photos have been moved to,
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2470,9 +2583,8 @@ calculate fingerprints for all photos in this directory, and
</li>
<li>
<p>
-if there is a match between a calculated fingerprint and the one originally calculated when a photo was
- loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> (even if the original file name has changed), automatically update the
- directory information so that <em>Subsurface</em> can find the photo in the new moved directory.
+if there is a match between a calculated fingerprint and the one calculated when a photo was
+originally loaded into <em>Subsurface</em> (even if the original file name has changed), automatically update the directory information so that <em>Subsurface</em> can find the photo in the new moved directory.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -2482,24 +2594,35 @@ if there is a match between a calculated fingerprint and the one originally calc
complete, after which <em>Subsurface</em> will show the appropriate photographs when a particular dive is opened.</p></div>
<div class="sidebarblock" id="Image_fingerprint_upgrade">
<div class="content">
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Upgrading existing photo collections without fingerprints</strong></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Upgrading legacy photo collections without fingerprints</strong></p></div>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/important.png" alt="Important" />
</td>
<td class="content"><em>Subsurface</em> automatically calculates fingerprints for all images that it can access.
-When manipulating images, be sure all the images associated with the dive log can be accessed by <em>Subsurface</em>.</td>
+When manipulating images, ensure that all the images associated with the dive log can be accessed by <em>Subsurface</em>.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> automatically checks and, if necessary, updates the fingerprints associated with a single dive if:
-- The images associated with that dive are visible as thumbnails on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>.
-- If you edit anything in the <strong>Notes tab</strong> panel and save the edits by selecting <em>Apply changes</em>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> automatically checks and, if necessary, updates the fingerprints associated with a single dive if:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The images associated with that dive are visible as thumbnails on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+If you edit anything in the <strong>Notes</strong> panel and save the edits by selecting <em>Apply changes</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
</div></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="_logging_special_types_of_dives">5.6. Logging special types of dives</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This section gives examples of the versatility of <em>Subsurface</em> as a dive logging tool.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="S_MulticylinderDives">5.6.1. Multicylinder dives</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> easily handles dives involving more than one cylinder. Multi-cylinder diving usually happens
@@ -2512,7 +2635,7 @@ as <em>Subsurface</em> is concerned, there are only two types of information tha
<p>
<strong>Describe the cylinders used during the dive</strong> This is performed in the <strong>Equipment tab</strong> of
the <strong>Info</strong> panel, as <a href="#cylinder_definitions">described above</a>. Enter the cylinders one by one,
- specifying each’s characteristics and the gas composition within it.
+ specifying its size and pressure, as well as the gas composition within it.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2520,7 +2643,8 @@ as <em>Subsurface</em> is concerned, there are only two types of information tha
<strong>Record the times at which the switch from one cylinder to another was done:</strong> This is information
tracked by some dive computers (provided the diver indicated these changes to the dive computer
by pressing specific buttons). If the dive computer does not provide the information, the diver has to
- record these changes using a different method, e.g. writing it on a slate.
+ record these changes using a different method, e.g. writing it on a slate or by creating a bookmark on the dive
+ computer.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2531,12 +2655,12 @@ as <em>Subsurface</em> is concerned, there are only two types of information tha
right-clicking, follow the context menu to "Add gas change" and select the appropriate cylinder from
those defined during the first step, above (see image below). If the
<strong>tank bar</strong> button in the toolbar has been activated, the cylinder switches are also indicated in the
- tank bar.
+ tank bar (image below).
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>When this is complete, <em>Subsurface</em> indicates the appropriate use of cylinders in the dive profile.
-Below is a multi-cylinder dive, starting off with EAN28, then changing cylinders to EAN50 after 26 minutes
+Below is a two-cylinder dive, starting off with EAN28, then changing cylinders to EAN50 after 26 minutes
for decompression.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
@@ -2547,8 +2671,8 @@ for decompression.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="_sidemount_dives">5.6.2. Sidemount dives</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Sidemount diving is just another form of multi-cylinder diving, often with both or all cylinders having
-the same gas mixture. Although it’s a popular configuration for cave divers, Sidemount
-diving can be done by recreational divers who’ve completed the appropriate training. sidemount
+the same gas mixture. Although it’s a popular configuration for cave divers, sidemount
+diving can be done by recreational divers who’ve completed the appropriate training. Sidemount
dive logging involves three steps, exactly as with multi-cylinder dives above:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
@@ -2560,14 +2684,14 @@ dive logging involves three steps, exactly as with multi-cylinder dives above:</
from these dive computers, the switching event between cylinders with the same gas is not downloaded. This may mean
that a diver may have to keep a written log of cylinder switch times using a slate, or (if the dive computer
has the capability) marking each cylinder switch with a bookmark that can be retrieved later. Returning
- from a dive with the times of cylinder changes is the only tricky part of logging sidemount dives.
+ from a dive with the times of cylinder changes is the only tedious part of logging sidemount dives.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
<strong>Within <em>Subsurface</em> describe the cylinders used during the dive</strong>. The diver needs to provide the
specifications of the different cylinders, using the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Info Panel</strong> (see
- image below where two 12 litre cylinder were used).
+ image below where two 12 litre cylinders were used).
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2590,7 +2714,6 @@ dive logging involves three steps, exactly as with multi-cylinder dives above:</
<img src="images/sidemount1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Sidemount profile" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>This section gives an example of the versatility of <em>Subsurface</em> as a dive logging tool.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="S_sSCR_dives">5.6.3. Semi-closed circuit rebreather (SCR) dives</h4>
@@ -2652,18 +2775,21 @@ and APD Discovery/Evolution dive computers. In contrast to a conventional recrea
dive computer, a CCR system computer does not allow the download of a log
containing multiple dives. Rather, each dive is stored independently. This
means that <em>Subsurface</em> cannot download a dive log directly from a CCR
-dive computer, but that it imports CCR dive logs in the same way it
+dive computer, but that it imports individual CCR dive profiles in the same way it
imports dive log data from other digital databases: one dive at a time.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
<div class="sect4">
<h5 id="_import_a_ccr_dive">Import a CCR dive</h5>
<div class="paragraph"><p>See the section dealing with <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importing dive information from other
-digital sources</a>. From the main menu of <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import &#8594; Import
+digital sources</a>. CCR dive data are currently obtained from the proprietary software
+provided when purchasing CCR dice equipment. See <a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Appendix B</a>
+for more complete information. Use that software to download the dive data into
+a known directory. From the main menu of <em>Subsurface</em>, select <em>Import &#8594; Import
log files</em> to bring up the <a href="#Unified_import">universal import dialogue</a>. As
explained in that section, the bottom right
hand of the import dialogue contains a dropdown list (labled <em>Filter:</em>) of appropriate devices
-that currently include(Poseidon) MkVI or APD log viewer files. Import for other
+that currently include (Poseidon) MkVI or APD log viewer files. Import for other
CCR equipment is under active development. Having selected the appropriate CCR format and
the directory where the original dive logs have been stored from the CCR dive
computer, select a particular dive log file (in the case of the MkVI
@@ -2754,7 +2880,7 @@ readings from a particular sensor.</p></div>
check boxes. Partial pressures for nitrogen (and helium, if applicable) are shown in the
usual way as for open circuit dives.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Events</em>: Several events are logged, e.g. switching the mouthpiece to open circuit.
-These events are indicated by yellow triangles and, if one hovers over a triangle,
+These events are indicated by yellow triangles and, if you hover over a triangle,
a description of that event is given as the bottom line in the <a href="#S_InfoBox">Information Box</a>.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Cylinder pressures</em>: Some CCR dive computers like the Poseidon MkVI record the
pressures of the oxygen and diluent cylinders. The pressures of these two cylinders
@@ -2814,7 +2940,7 @@ toxicity units (OTU) incurred.</p></div>
<td class="content">Gas consumption and SAC calculations:
<em>Subsurface</em> calculates SAC and Gas consumption taking in account gas
incompressibility, particularly at tank pressures above 200 bar, making them more accurate.
-Users should refer to <a href="#SAC_CALCULATION">Appendix F</a> for more information.</td>
+Refer to <a href="#SAC_CALCULATION">Appendix F</a> for more information.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
</div>
@@ -2852,8 +2978,8 @@ shallowest and deepest dives of those selected.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Of all the panels in <em>Subsurface</em>, the Dive Profile contains the most detailed
-information about each dive. The Dive Profile has a <strong>button bar</strong> on the left hand side
-that lets you control several display options. The functions of these
+information about each dive. The Dive Profile has a <strong>button bar</strong> on the left hand side,
+allowing control of several display options. The functions of these
buttons are described below. The main item in the Dive
Profile is the graph of
dive depth as a function of time. In addition to
@@ -2915,8 +3041,199 @@ panel. Clicking the <strong>Scale</strong> button in the toolbar on the left of
increases the size of the dive profile to fill the area of the panel.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Water temperature</strong> is displayed with its own blue line with temperature values
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Water temperature</strong> is shown as a blue line with temperature values
placed adjacent to significant changes.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_InfoBox">6.4.1. The <strong>Information Box</strong></h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The Information box displays a large range of information about the dive
+profile. Normally the Information Box is located to the top left of the <strong>Dive
+Profile</strong> panel. If the mouse points outside of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, then
+only the top line of the Information Box is visible (see left-hand part of
+figure (<strong>A</strong>) below). The Information Box can be moved around in the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>
+panel by click-dragging it with the mouse so that it is not obstructing
+important detail. The position of the Information Box is saved and used again
+during subsequent dive analyses.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/InfoBox2.jpg" alt="Figure: Information Box" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>When the mouse points inside the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, the information box expands and
+shows many data items. In this situation, the data reflect the time point along
+the dive profile shown by the mouse cursor (see right-hand part of figure (<strong>B</strong>) above
+where the Information Box reflects the situation at the position of the cursor
+[arrow] in that image). Moving the cursor horizontally lets the Information Box show information for any point
+along the dive profile. It gives extensive statistics about depth, gas
+and ceiling characteristics of the particular dive. These include: Time period
+into the dive (indicated by a @), depth, cylinder pressure (P), temperature,
+ascent/descent rate, surface air consumption (SAC), oxygen partial pressure,
+maximum operating depth, equivalent air depth (EAD), equivalent narcotic depth
+(END), equivalent air density depth (EADD), decompression requirements at that
+instant in time (Deco), time to surface (TTS), the calculated ceiling, as well
+as of the statistics in the Information Box, shown as four
+buttons on the left of the profile panel. These are:</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/MOD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Show the <strong>Maximum Operating Depth (MOD)</strong> of the dive, given the
+gas mixture used. MOD is dependent on the oxygen concentration in the breathing gas.
+For air (21% oxygen) it is around 57 m if a maximum pO<sub>2</sub> of 1.4 is specified in the <strong>Preferences</strong> section
+(select <em>File &#8594; Preferences &#8594; Graph</em> and edit the text box <em>pO<sub>2</sub> in calculating MOD</em>.
+When diving below the MOD there is a markedly increased risk of exposure to the dangers of oxygen toxicity.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/NDL.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Show either the <strong>No-deco Limit (NDL)</strong> or the
+<strong>Total Time to Surface (TTS)</strong>. NDL is the time duration that a diver can continue with a
+dive, given the present depth, that does not require decompression (that is, before an
+ascent ceiling appears). Once a diver has exceeded the NDL and decompression is required (that
+is, there is an ascent ceiling above the diver) then TTS gives the number of minutes
+required before the diver can surface. TTS includes ascent time as well as decompression
+time. TTS is calculated assuming an ascent surface air consumption (SAC) for
+the gas currently used. Even if the profile contains several gas
+switches, TTS at a specific moment during the dive is calculated using the current gas.
+TTS longer than 2 hours is not accurately calculated and Subsurface only indicates <em>TTS &gt; 2h</em>.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/SAC.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Show the <strong>Surface Air Consumption (SAC)</strong>, an indication of the surface-normalized respiration
+rate of a diver. The value of SAC is less than the real
+respiration rate because a diver at 10m uses breathing gas at a rate roughly double that of
+the equivalent rate at the surface. SAC gives an indication of breathing gas consumption rate
+independent of the depth of the dive, so the respiratory rates of different dives
+can be compared. The units for SAC is liters/min or cubic ft/min.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/EAD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Show the <strong>Equivalent Air Depth (EAD)</strong> for
+nitrox dives as well as the <strong>Equivalent
+Narcotic Depth (END)</strong> for trimix dives. These are
+important to divers breathing gases other than air. Their
+values are dependent on the composition of the breathing gas. The EAD
+is the depth of a hypothetical air dive that has the same partial
+pressure of nitrogen as the current depth of the nitrox dive at
+hand. A nitrox dive leads to the same decompression obligation as an
+air dive to the depth equalling the EAD. The END is the depth of a
+hypothetical air dive that has the same sum of partial pressures of
+the narcotic gases nitrogen and oxygen as the current trimix dive. A
+trimix diver can expect the same narcotic effect as a diver breathing
+air diving at a depth equalling the END.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Figure (<strong>B</strong>) above shows an information box with a nearly complete set of data.</p></div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">The Gas Pressure Bar Graph</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>On the left of the <strong>Information Box</strong> is a vertical bar graph showing the
+pressures of the nitrogen (and other inert gases, e.g. helium, if applicable) that the diver
+was inhaling <em>at a particular instant during the dive</em>, shown by the position
+of the cursor on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The drawing on the left below indicates the
+meaning of the different parts of the Gas Pressure Bar Graph.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/GasPressureBarGraph.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Gas Pressure bar Graph" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The light green area indicates the gas pressure, with the top margin of the light green
+ area showing the total gas pressure of ALL gases inhaled by the diver and measured from the bottom
+ of the graph to the top of the light green area. This pressure has a <em>relative</em> value in the graph
+ and does not indicate absolute pressure.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The horizontal black line underneath the light green margin indicates the equilibrium pressure
+ of the INERT gases inhaled by the diver, usually nitrogen. In
+ the case of trimix, it is the pressures of nitrogen and helium combined. In this example,
+ the user is diving with EAN32, so the equilibrium inert gas pressure is 68% of the distance from the
+ bottom of the graph to the total gas pressure value.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The dark green area at the bottom of the graph represents the pressures of inert gas in each
+ of the 16 tissue compartments, following the Bühlmann algorithm, with fast tissues on the
+ left hand side.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The top black horizontal line indicates the inert gas pressure limit determined by the gradient
+ factor that applies to the depth of
+ the diver at the particular point on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The gradient factor shown is an
+ interpolation between the GFLow and GFHigh values specified in the <em>Graph</em> tab of the <strong>Preferences
+ Panel</strong> of <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The bottom margin of the red area in the graph indicates the Bühlman-derived M-value. That is the
+ pressure value of inert gases at which bubble formation is expected to be severe, resulting
+ in a significant risk of decompression sickness.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>These five values are shown on the left in the image above. The way the Gas Pressure Bar Graph changes
+during a dive can be seen on the right hand side of the above figure for a diver using EAN32.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>A</strong> indicates the start of a dive with the diver at the surface. The pressures in all
+ the tissue compartments are still at the surface equilibrium pressure because no diving has taken place.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>B</strong> indicates the situation after a descent to 30 meters. Few of the tissue compartments have had
+ time to respond to the descent, so their gas pressures are far below the equilibrium gas pressure.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>C</strong> represents the pressures after 30 minutes at 30 m. The fast compartments have attained
+ equilibrium (i.e. they have reached the height of the black line indicating the equilibrium pressure). The
+ slower compartments (towards the right) have not reached equilibrium and are in the process of slowly
+ increasing in pressure.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>D</strong> shows the pressures after ascent to a depth of 4.5 meters. Since during ascent the total
+ inhaled gas pressure has decreased strongly from 4 bar to 1.45 bar, the pressures in the different tissue
+ compartments now exceed that of the total gas pressure and approach the gradient factor value (i.e.
+ the top black horizontal line). Further ascent will result in exceeding the gradient
+ factor value (GFHigh), endangering the diver.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Graph <strong>E</strong> indicates the situation after remaining at 4.5 meters for 10 minutes. The fast compartments
+ have decreased in pressure. As expected, the pressures in the slow compartments have not changed much.
+ The pressures in the fast compartments do not approach the GFHigh value any more and the diver is safer
+ than in the situation indicated in graph <strong>D</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_the_profile_toolbar">6.4.2. The Profile Toolbar</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The dive profile can include graphs of the <strong>partial pressures</strong>
of O<sub>2</sub>, N<sub>2</sub>, and He during the dive (see figure above) as well as a calculated and dive computer
reported deco ceilings (only visible for deep, long, or repetitive dives).
@@ -2928,7 +3245,7 @@ partial pressure graphs are shown below the profile data.</p></div>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/O2.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>oxygen</strong> during the
+<td class="content">Show the partial pressure of <strong>oxygen</strong> during the
dive. This is shown below the dive depth and water temperature graphs.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
@@ -2937,7 +3254,7 @@ dive. This is shown below the dive depth and water temperature graphs.</td>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/N2.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>nitrogen</strong> during the dive.</td>
+<td class="content">Show the partial pressure of <strong>nitrogen</strong> during the dive.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
<div class="admonitionblock">
@@ -2945,19 +3262,19 @@ dive. This is shown below the dive depth and water temperature graphs.</td>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/He.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking this button allows display of the partial pressure of <strong>helium</strong> during the dive.
+<td class="content">Display of the partial pressure of <strong>helium</strong> during the dive.
This is only important to divers using Trimix, Helitrox or similar breathing gasses.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The <strong>air consumption</strong> graph displays the tank pressure and its change during the
dive. The air consumption takes depth into account so that even when manually
entering the start and end pressures the graph, is not a straight line.
-Like the depth graph, the slope of the tank pressure gives you information
+Like the depth graph, the slope of the tank pressure provides information
about the
momentary SAC rate (Surface Air Consumption) when using an air integrated dive computer.
Here the color
-coding is not relative to some absolute values but relative to the average
-normalized air consumption during the dive. So areas that are red or orange
+coding is not relative to some absolute values but relative to the mean
+normalized air consumption during the dive. So areas in red or orange
indicate
times of increased normalized air consumption while dark green reflects times
when the diver was using less gas than average.</p></div>
@@ -2966,19 +3283,20 @@ when the diver was using less gas than average.</p></div>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/Heartbutton.png" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking on the heart rate button will allow the display of heart rate information
+<td class="content">Clicking on the heart rate button allows display of heart rate information
during the dive if the dive computer was attached to a heart rate sensor.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>It is possible to <strong>zoom</strong> into the profile graph. This is done either by using
-the scroll wheel / scroll gesture of your mouse or trackpad. By default
+the scroll wheel / scroll gesture of the mouse or trackpad. By default
<em>Subsurface</em> always shows a profile area large enough for at least 30 minutes
-and 30m
- (100ft) – this way short or shallow dives are easily recognizable;
-something free divers won’t care about.
-<span class="image">
-<img src=":images/MeasuringBar.png" alt="FIGURE: Measuring Bar" />
-</span></p></div>
+and 30m (100ft) – this way short or shallow dives are easily recognizable;
+something free divers won’t care about.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/MeasuringBar.png" alt="FIGURE: Measuring Bar" />
+</div>
+</div>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -3063,15 +3381,30 @@ compartments following the Bühlmann model (<strong>B</strong> in figure below).
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/ceiling3.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">If, in addition, the <strong>3m increments</strong> button on the Profile Panel is clicked, then the ceiling is indicated in 3 m increments
-(<strong>C</strong> in figure below).</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
+<td class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If, in addition, the <strong>3m increments</strong> button on the Profile Panel is clicked, then the ceiling is indicated in 3 m increments
+(<strong>C</strong> in figure below).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Ceilings2.jpg" alt="Figure: Ceiling with 3m resolution" />
</div>
</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their depths. For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on <a href="#GradientFactors_Ref">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>. The currently used gradient factors (e.g. GF 35/75) are shown above the depth profile if the appropriate toolbar buttons are activated. N.B.: The indicated gradient factors are NOT the gradient factors in use by the dive computer, but those used by Subsurface to calculate deco obligations during the dive. For more information external to this manual see:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -3091,53 +3424,113 @@ red bar. The image below shows a dive which first uses a trimix cylinder (red an
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/tissues.jpg" alt="Note" />
+<img src="images/icons/heatmap.png" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Display inert gas tissue pressures relative to ambient inert gas pressure (horizontal grey line).
-Tissue pressures are calculated using the Bühlmann ZH-L16 algorithm and are displayed as lines ranging from
-green (faster tissues) to blue (slower tissues).
-The black line, graphed above the ambient pressure, is the maximum allowable tissue supersaturation (pressure limit) derived
-from the gradient factors specified in the <strong>Preferences</strong>. For
-divers doing planned decompression diving, efficient rates of offgassing are obtained with tissue pressures
-between the ambient inert gas pressure (grey line) and the pressure limit (black line). This display is a representation
-of the tissue pressures during the whole dive. In contrast, the <a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gas Pressure Graph</a> in the <strong>Information Box</strong>
-on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> is an instantaneous reflection of tissue pressures at the moment in
-time, at the position of the cursor on the dive profile.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
+<td class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Display the tissue heat-map. The heat map summarises, for the duration of the dive, the inert gas tissue pressures
+for each of the 16 tissue compartments of the Bühlmann model. Blue colours mean low gas pressures in a tissue compartment
+and thus on-gassing, green to red means excess gas in the tissue and thus off-gassing. Fast to slow tissues are indicated from
+top to bottom. The figure below explains in greater detail how the heat map can be interpreted.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/tissuesGraph.jpg" alt="Figure: Inert gas tissue pressure graph" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Gradient Factor settings strongly affect the calculated ceilings and their depths.
-For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>. The
-currently used gradient factors (e.g. GF 35/75) are shown above the depth profile if the appropriate toolbar buttons are activated.
-<strong>N.B.:</strong> The indicated gradient factors are NOT the gradient factors in use by the dive computer,
-but those used by <em>Subsurface</em> to calculate deco obligations
-during the dive. For more information external to this manual see:</p></div>
+<img src="images/Heatmap.jpg" alt="Figure: Inert gas tissue pressure heat-map" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Image <strong>A</strong> on the left shows the <a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gas Pressure Graph</a> in the
+<strong>Information box</strong>, representing a snapshot of inert gas pressures at a particular point in time
+during the dive. The inert gas pressures of 16 tissue compartments are shown as dark green vertical
+bars with the quick tissue compartments on the left and the slow tissue compartments
+on the right. Refer to the section on the <a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gas Pressure Graph</a>
+for more details on the different elements of this graph.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Image <strong>B</strong> shows a gradient of unique colours, spanning the whole range of inert gas pressures.
+It is possible to map the height of each of the dark green vertical bars of <strong>A</strong> to a
+colour in <strong>B</strong>. For instance, the fastest (leftmost) dark green verical bar in <strong>A</strong> has
+a height corresponding to the medium green part of <strong>B</strong>. The height of this bar can therefore be summarised
+using a medium green colour. Similarly, the highest dark green bar in <strong>A</strong> is as high
+as the yellow part of <strong>B</strong>. The 14 remaining tissue pressure bars in <strong>A</strong> can also be
+translated to colours. The colours represent three ranges of tissue inert gas pressure:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
+The bottom range in <strong>B</strong> (marked <em>On-gassing</em>) includes colours from light blue to black, representing tissue gas pressures
+ below the equilibrium pressure of inert gas (bottom horizontal line in <strong>A</strong>). The measurement
+ unit is the % of inert gas pressure, relative to the equilibrium inert gas pressure. In this range
+ on-gassing of inert gas takes place because the inert gas pressure in the tissue compartment is lower than
+ in the surrounding environment. Black areas in the heat map indicate that a tissue compartment has reached
+ the equilibrium inert gas pressure, i.e. the inert gas pressure in the tissue compartment equals that
+ of the water in which the diver is. The equilibrium pressure changes according to depth.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a>
+The central range in <strong>B</strong> includes the colours from black to light green, when the inert gas pressure of a tissue
+ compartment is higher than the equilibrium pressure but less than the ambient pressure.
+ In this zone decompression is not very efficient
+ because the gradient of inert gas pressure from tissue to the environment is relatively small
+ and indicated by dark green areas of the heat map.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+The top range in <strong>B</strong> (marked <em>Off-gassing</em>) includes colours from light green to red and white, repesenting tissue gas
+ pressures above that of the total ambient pressure (top of light green area of <strong>A</strong>). The measurement
+ unit is the % of inert gas pressure above ambient pressure, relative to the Bühlmann M-value gradient (bottom of red area
+ in <strong>A</strong>). These tissue pressures are normally reached while ascending to a shallower depth.
+ Below a value of 100%, this range indicates efficient off-gassing of inert gas from the tissue compartment into the
+ environment. Usually, efficient off-gassing is indicated by light green, yellow or orange colours.
+ Above 100% (red to white in <strong>B</strong>) the M-value gradient is exceeded and the probability of decompression sickness
+ increases markedly.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Image <strong>C</strong> shows the colour mapping of each of the vertical bars in <strong>A</strong>, the fast
+tissues (on the left in <strong>A</strong>) depicted at the top
+and the slow tissue compartments at the bottom of <strong>C</strong>. The highest vertical bar in <strong>A</strong>
+(vertical bar 3rd from the left) is presented as the yellow rectangle 3rd from the top
+in <strong>C</strong>. The 16 vertical bars in <strong>A</strong> are now presented as a vertical
+column of 16 coloured rectangles, representing a snapshot of tissue compartment gas pressures
+at a particular instant during the dive.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Image <strong>D</strong> is a compilation of similar colour mappings of 16 tissue compartments
+during a 10-minute period of a dive, the colours representing the
+inert gas loading of a tissue compartment at a point in time during the dive. Faster tissues
+are shown at the top and slower tissues at the bottom, with time
+forming the horizontal axis of the graph. The column of rectangles in <strong>C</strong> can be found
+on the horizontal axis between 9 and 10 minutes.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The colours of the heat map are not affected by the gradient factor settings.
+This is because the heat map indicates tissue pressures relative to the Bühlmann M-value gradient, and
+not relative to any specific gradient factor. For more information external to this manual see:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Since the colours of the heat map are not affected by the gradient factor(s), the heat map is also
+applicable when using the VPM-B decompression model.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The image below compares the profiles and heat maps for two planned decompression dives to 60m:
+the first using the Bühlmann decompression model, the second using the VPM-B decompression model.
+Both profiles have the same total decompression time, but the VPM-B model requires deeper stops early in the acent phase.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In both profiles, the inert gas pressures in the faster tissues rise much more rapidly than the slower tissues during
+the descent and bottom phase, with the colors transitioning from light blue through blue and purple to black.
+Similarly, the inert gas pressure in the fast tissues reduces more rapidly than the slow tissues at each decompression stop,
+with colors transitioning from red, orange and yellow to green and black.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The comparison of the two profiles and heatmaps shows that by including deep stops, the oversaturation gradient in the
+faster tissues early in ascent phase is reduced.
+However, on-gassing of slower tissues continues during the deep stops, which leads to greater oversaturation gradient
+in slower tissues at the end of the dive.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/tissueHeatmap.jpg" alt="Figure: Inert gas tissue pressure heat-map" />
</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_dive_profile_context_menu">6.5. The Dive Profile context menu</h3>
+</div>
+</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_the_dive_profile_context_menu">6.4.3. The Dive Profile context menu</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The context menu for the Dive Profile is accessed by right-clicking while the
-mouse cursor is over the Dive Profile panel. The menu lets you create
+mouse cursor is over the Dive Profile panel. The menu allows creating
Bookmarks, Gas Change Event markers, or manual CCR set-point changes
other than the ones that might have been
imported from a Dive Computer. Markers are placed against the depth profile line,
-with the time of the event set by where the mouse cursor was when the right
-mouse button was first clicked to bring up the menu. Gas Change events
+with the time of the event determined by the mouse cursor when the right
+mouse button was clicked to bring up the menu. Gas Change events
involve a selection of which gas is being switched TO. The list of choices is based on
the available gases defined in the <strong>Equipment</strong> Tab. Setpoint change
events open a dialog letting you choose the next setpoint value. As
@@ -3149,199 +3542,6 @@ an existing marker a menu appears, adding options to allow deletion of the
marker, or to allow all markers of that type to be hidden. Hidden events can be
restored to view by selecting Unhide all events from the context menu.</p></div>
</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_InfoBox">6.6. The <strong>Information Box</strong></h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The Information box displays a large range of information about the dive
-profile. Normally the Information Box is located to the top left of the <strong>Dive
-Profile</strong> panel. If the mouse points outside of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, then
-only the top line of the Information Box is visible (see left-hand part of
-figure (<strong>A</strong>) below). The Information Box can be moved around in the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>
-panel by click-dragging it with the mouse so that it is not obstructing
-important detail. The position of the Information Box is saved and used again
-during subsequent dive analyses.</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/InfoBox2.jpg" alt="Figure: Information Box" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>When the mouse points inside the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, the information box expands and
-shows many data items. In this situation, the data reflect the time point along
-the dive profile shown by the mouse cursor (see right-hand part of figure (<strong>B</strong>) above
-where the Information Box reflects the situation at the position of the cursor
-[arrow] in that image). Moving the cursor horizontally lets the Information Box show information for any point
-along the
-dive profile.
-In this mode, the Information Box gives extensive statistics about depth, gas
-and ceiling characteristics of the particular dive. These include: Time period
-into the dive (indicated by a @), depth, cylinder pressure (P), temperature,
-ascent/descent rate, surface air consumption (SAC), oxygen partial pressure,
-maximum operating depth, equivalent air depth (EAD), equivalent narcotic depth
-(END), equivalent air density depth (EADD), decompression requirements at that
-instant in time (Deco), time to surface (TTS), the calculated ceiling, as well
-as the calculated ceiling for several Bühlmann tissue compartments.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The user has control over the display of some statistics, shown as four
-buttons on the left of the profile panel. These are:</p></div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/MOD.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>Maximum Operating Depth
-(MOD)</strong> of the dive, given the
-gas mixture used. MOD is dependent on the oxygen concentration in the breathing gas.
-For air (21% oxygen) it is around 57 m if a maximum pO<sub>2</sub> of 1.4 is specified in the <strong>Preferences</strong> section
-(select <em>File</em> &#8594; Preferences &#8594; Graph_ and edit the text box <em>Max pO<sub>2</sub> when showing MOD</em>.
-Below the MOD there is a markedly increased
-risk of exposure to the dangers of oxygen toxicity.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/NDL.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display either the <strong>No-deco Limit (NDL)</strong> or the
-<strong>Total Time to Surface (TTS)</strong>. NDL is the time duration that a diver can continue with a
-dive, given the present depth, that does not require decompression (that is, before an
-ascent ceiling appears). Once a diver has exceeded the NDL and decompression is required (that
-is, there is an ascent ceiling above the diver) then TTS gives the number of minutes
-required before the diver can surface. TTS includes ascent time as well as decompression
-time. TTS is calculated assuming an ascent surface air consumption (SAC) for
-the gas currently used. Even if the profile contains several gas
-switches, TTS at a specific moment during the dive is calculated using the current gas.
-TTS longer than 2 hours is not accurately calculated and Subsurface only indicates <em>TTS &gt; 2h</em>.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/SAC.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking this button causes the Information Box to display the <strong>Surface Air Consumption (SAC)</strong>.
-SAC is an indication of the surface-normalized respiration rate of a diver. The value of SAC
-is less than the real
-respiration rate because a diver at 10m uses breathing gas at a rate roughly double that of
-the equivalent rate at the surface. SAC gives an indication of breathing gas consumption rate
-independent of the depth of the dive, so the respiratory rates of different dives
-can be compared. The units for SAC is liters/min or cubic ft/min.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/EAD.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Clicking this button displays the <strong>Equivalent Air Depth (EAD)</strong> for
-nitrox dives as well as the <strong>Equivalent
-Narcotic Depth (END)</strong> for trimix dives. These are
-important to divers breathe gases other than air. Their
-values are dependent on the composition of the breathing gas. The EAD
-is the depth of a hypothetical air dive that has the same partial
-pressure of nitrogen as the current depth of the nitrox dive at
-hand. A nitrox dive leads to the same decompression obligation as an
-air dive to the depth equalling the EAD. The END is the depth of a
-hypothetical air dive that has the same sum of partial pressures of
-the narcotic gases nitrogen and oxygen as the current trimix dive. A
-trimix diver can expect the same narcotic effect as a diver breathing
-air diving at a depth equalling the END.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Figure (<strong>B</strong>) above shows an information box with a nearly complete set of data.</p></div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">6.6.1. The Gas Pressure Bar Graph</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>On the left of the <strong>Information Box</strong> is a vertical bar graph showing the
-pressures of the nitrogen (and other inert gases, e.g. helium, if applicable) that the diver
-was inhaling <em>at a particular instant during the dive</em>. It is shown by the position
-of the cursor on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The drawing on the left below indicates the
-meaning of the different parts of the Gas Pressure Bar Graph.</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/GasPressureBarGraph.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Gas Pressure bar Graph" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-The light green area indicates the total gas, with the top margin of the light green
- area showing the total gas pressure inhaled by the diver and measured from the bottom
- of the graph to the top of the light green area. This pressure has a <em>relative</em> value in the graph
- and does not indicate absolute pressure.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-The horizontal black line underneath the light green margin indicates the equilibrium pressure
- of the inert gases inhaled by the diver, usually nitrogen. In
- the case of trimix, it is the pressures of nitrogen and helium combined. In this example,
- the user is diving with EAN32, so the inert gas pressure is 68% of the distance from the
- bottom of the graph to the total gas pressure value.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-The dark green area at the bottom of the graph represents the pressures of inert gas in each
- of the 16 tissue compartments, following the Bühlmann algorithm, the fast tissues being on the
- left hand side.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-The top black horizontal line indicates the gradient factor that applies to the depth of
- the diver at the particular point on the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>. The gradient factor shown is an
- interpolation between the GFLow and GFHigh values specified in the Graph tab of the <strong>Preferences
- Panel</strong> of <strong>Subsurface</strong>.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-The bottom margin of the red area in the graph indicates the Bühlman-derived M-value. That is the
- pressure value of inert gases at which bubble formation is expected to be severe, resulting
- in decompression sickness.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>These five values are shown on the left in the graph above. The way the Gas Pressure Bar Graph changes
-during a dive can be seen on the right hand side of the above figure for a diver using EAN32.</p></div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-Graph <strong>A</strong> indicates the start of a dive with the diver at the surface. The pressures in all
- the tissue compartments are still at the equilibrium pressure because no diving has taken place.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-Graph <strong>B</strong> indicates the situation after a descent to 30 meters. Few of the tissue compartments have had
- time to respond to the descent, so their gas pressures are far below the equilibrium gas pressure.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-Graph <strong>C</strong> represents the pressures after 30 minutes at 30 m. The fast compartments have attained
- equilibrium (i.e. they have reached the hight of the black line indicating the equilibrium pressure). The
- slower compartments (towards the right) have not reached equilibrium and are in the process of slowly
- increasing in pressure.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-Graph <strong>D</strong> shows the pressures after ascent to a depth of 4.5 meters. Since during ascent the total
- inhaled gas pressure has decreased strongly from 4 bar to 1.45 bar, the pressures in the different tissue
- compartments now exceed that of the total gas pressure and approach the gradient factor value (i.e.
- the top black horizontal line). Further ascent will result in exceeding the gradient
- factor value (GFHigh), endangering the diver.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-Graph <strong>E</strong> indicates the situation after remaining at 4.5 meters for 10 minutes. The fast compartments
- have decreased in pressure. As expected, the pressures in the slow compartments have not changed much.
- The pressures in the fast compartments do not approach the GFHigh value any more and the diver is safer
- than in the situation indicated in graph <strong>D</strong>.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
-</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
@@ -3349,7 +3549,7 @@ Graph <strong>E</strong> indicates the situation after remaining at 4.5 meters f
<h2 id="_organizing_the_logbook_manipulating_groups_of_dives">7. Organizing the logbook (Manipulating groups of dives)</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_the_dive_list_context_menu">7.1. The Dive List context menu</h3>
+<h3 id="S_DiveListContextMenu">7.1. The Dive List context menu</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Several actions on either a single dive, or a group of dives, can be performed using the Dive List
Context Menu. It is found by selecting either a single dive or a group of dives and then right-clicking.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -3368,7 +3568,7 @@ Context Menu. It is found by selecting either a single dive or a group of dives
<div class="paragraph"><p>The default information in the <strong>Dive List</strong> includes, for each dive, Dive_number, Date, Rating, Dive_depth,
Dive_duration and Dive_location. This information can be controlled and changed by right-clicking on the
header bar of the <strong>Dive List</strong>. For instance, a right-click on the <em>Date</em> header brings up a list of items
-that can be shown in the dive list (see above). Select an item to be shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> or be
+that can be shown in the dive list (see above). Select an item to be included in the <strong>Dive List</strong> or to be
deleted (reflected by the check symbols) and the list is immediately updated. Preferences for information
shown in the <strong>Dive List</strong> are saved and used when <em>Subsurface</em> is re-opened.</p></div>
</div>
@@ -3380,12 +3580,12 @@ numbers) to recent dives (higher sequence numbers). Numbering
of dives is not always consistent. For instance, when non-recent dives are
added, correct numbering does not automatically follow on because
of the dives that are more recent in date/time than the newly-added dive with
-an older date/time. So you may need to renumber the dives.
-Do this by selecting (from the Main Menu) <em>Log &#8594; Renumber</em>. Users are
-given a choice of the lowest sequence number to be used.
+an older date/time. This requires renumbering the dives.
+Do this by selecting (from the Main Menu) <em>Log &#8594; Renumber</em>. Provide
+the lowest sequence number to be used.
This results in new sequence numbers (based on date/time)
-for the dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>You can also renumber a few selected dives in the dive list. Select the dives that
+for all the dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Renumber a few selected dives in the dive list by selecting only the dives that
need renumbering. Right-click on the selected list and use the Dive List Context Menu
to perform the renumbering. A popup window appears letting the user specify
the starting number for the process.</p></div>
@@ -3394,7 +3594,7 @@ the starting number for the process.</p></div>
<h3 id="S_Group">7.3. Grouping dives into trips and manipulating trips</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>For regular divers, the dive list can rapidly become very long. <em>Subsurface</em>
can group dives into <em>trips</em>. It does this by grouping dives that have
-date/times not separated in time by more than two days, so creating
+date/times not separated by more than two days and creating
a single heading for each diving trip represented in the dive log. Below is an
ungrouped dive list (<strong>A</strong>, on the left) as well as the corresponding grouped dive
list of five dive trips (<strong>B</strong>, on the right):</p></div>
@@ -3405,12 +3605,12 @@ list of five dive trips (<strong>B</strong>, on the right):</p></div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Grouping into trips allows a rapid way of accessing individual dives without
having to scan a long lists of dives. To group the dives in a dive list,
-(from the Main Menu) select <em>Log &#8594; Autogroup</em>. The <strong>Dive List</strong> panel
+(from the Main Menu) select <em>Log &#8594; Auto group</em>. The <strong>Dive List</strong> panel
now shows only the titles for the trips.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="_editing_the_title_and_associated_information_for_a_particular_trip">7.3.1. Editing the title and associated information for a particular trip</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Normally, in the dive list, minimal information is included in the trip title.
-More information about a trip can be added by selecting its trip title from
+More information about a trip can be added by selecting its trip title bar from
the <strong>Dive List</strong>. This shows a <strong>Trip Notes</strong> tab in the <strong>Notes</strong> panel. Here
you can add or edit information about the date/time, the trip location and any
other general comments about the trip as a whole (e.g. the dive
@@ -3424,8 +3624,8 @@ edited information.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="_viewing_the_dives_during_a_particular_trip">7.3.2. Viewing the dives during a particular trip</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the dives have been grouped into trips, you can expand one or more
-trips by clicking the arrow-head on the left of each trip title. This expands
-the selected trip, revealing individual dives done during the trip.</p></div>
+trips by clicking the expansion button [+/-] on the left of each trip title. This expands
+the selected trip, revealing individual dives during the trip.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="_collapsing_or_expanding_dive_information_for_different_trips">7.3.3. Collapsing or expanding dive information for different trips</h4>
@@ -3495,9 +3695,9 @@ option of whether the time adjustment should be earlier or later.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="_merge_dives_into_a_single_dive">7.4.5. Merge dives into a single dive</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Sometimes a dive is briefly interrupted, for example, if a diver returns to the surface
-for a few minutes. That results in two or more dives being recorded by the dive
-computer and appearing as different dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel. You can
-merge these dives onto a single dive by selecting the appropriate dives,
+for a few minutes, resulting in two or more dives being recorded by the dive
+computer and appearing as different dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel.
+Merge these dives onto a single dive by selecting the appropriate dives,
right-clicking them to bring up the context menu and then selecting <strong>Merge selected
dives</strong>. It may be necessary to edit the dive information in the <strong>Notes</strong>
panel to reflect events or conditions that apply to the merged dive. The figure
@@ -3518,7 +3718,7 @@ To do this after performing any of these actions, from the <strong>Main Menu</st
</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="S_Filter">7.5. Filtering the dive list</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>The dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel can be filtered, so you can select only some
+<div class="paragraph"><p>The dives in the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel can be filtered, selecting only some
of the dives based on their attributes, e.g. dive tags, dive site, dive master, buddy or protective
clothing. For instance, filtering lets you list the deep dives at a particular
dive site, or otherwise the cave dives with a particular buddy.</p></div>
@@ -3526,9 +3726,9 @@ dive site, or otherwise the cave dives with a particular buddy.</p></div>
<em>Filter Panel</em> at the top of the <em>Subsurface</em> window. Three icons are located at the top
right hand of the filter panel (see image below). The <em>Filter Panel</em> can be reset
(i.e. all current filters cleared) by selecting the <strong>yellow angled arrow</strong>. The <em>Filter Panel</em> may also be
-minimized by selecting the <strong>green up-arrow". When minimized, only these three icons are shown.
+minimized by selecting the <strong>green up-arrow</strong>. When minimized, only these three icons are shown.
The panel can be maximized by clicking the same icon that minimized it. The filter may also be
-reset and closed by selecting the *red button</strong> with the white cross.</p></div>
+reset and closed by selecting the <strong>red button</strong> with the white cross.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Filterpanel.jpg" alt="Figure: Filter panel" />
@@ -3571,7 +3771,7 @@ Export dive information to <em>Facebook</em>
<h3 id="S_facebook">8.1. Exporting dive information to <em>Facebook</em></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Export of dives to <em>Facebook</em> is handled differently from other types of export because
a connection to <em>Facebook</em> is required, needing a <em>Facebook</em> userID and password.
-If, from the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, you select <em>File &#8594; Preferences &#8594; Facebook</em>, a login screen comes up.
+If, from the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, you select <em>Share on &#8594; Connect to &#8594; Facebook</em>, a login screen comes up.
(image <strong>A</strong> to the left, below). Provide a <em>Facebook</em> userID and password.
Once logged into to <em>Facebook</em> , the panel
in image <strong>B</strong>, below is shown, including a <em>Disconnect from Facebook</em> button to close the
@@ -3582,10 +3782,10 @@ in image <strong>B</strong>, below is shown, including a <em>Disconnect from Fac
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>From the <em>Subsurface</em> window it’s easy to determine whether <em>Subsurface</em> has a valid connection to <em>Facebook</em>
-From the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, select <em>Share on &#8594; Facebook</em> (image <strong>A</strong>, below). Normally, the <em>Facebook</em> option is greyed out. But
+From the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, select <em>Share on</em> (image <strong>A</strong>, below). Normally, the <em>Facebook</em> option is greyed out. But
if there is a connection to <em>Facebook</em>, this option is active (i.e. in black color and can be selected).</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Having established a login to <em>Facebook</em>, transferring a dive profileto a <em>Facebook</em> timeline is easy.
-Be sure the dive to be transferred to the timeline is shown in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel. If, from the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, you
+Ensure that the dive to be transferred to the timeline is shown in the <em>Subsurface</em> <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel. If, from the <strong>Main Menu</strong>, you
select <em>Share on &#8594; Facebook</em> (see image <strong>A</strong> below), a dialogue box is shown, determining the amount of additional information transferred along
with the dive profile (image <strong>B</strong>, below). To transfer a dive profile to <em>Facebook</em>, the name of a
<em>Facebook</em> album is needed. The checkboxes on the left hand side let you decide how much
@@ -3617,7 +3817,7 @@ radio button (see images below).</p></div>
<img src="images/Export_f20.jpg" alt="Figure: Export dialog" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>A dive log or part of it can be saved in three formats:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A dive log or part of it can be saved in several formats:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -3665,13 +3865,13 @@ Universal Dive Data Format (<em>UDDF</em>). Refer to <em>http://uddf.org</em> fo
with an Internet browser. Most modern web browsers are supported, but JavaScript
must be enabled. The HTML export cannot be changed or edited.
It contains most of the information recorded in the dive log. However, it does not show the
- calculated values in the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, e.g. calculated cylinder pressure, gas
+ calculated values in the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel, e.g. dive ceiling, calculated cylinder pressure, gas
pressures and MOD. The HTML export contains a search
option to search the dive log. HTML export is specified on the second tab of the
- Export dialog (image <strong>B</strong> above). A typical use of this option is to export all one&#8217;s
+ Export dialog (image <strong>B</strong> above). A typical use of this option is to export all your
dives to a smartphone or a tablet where it would serve as a portable record
- of dives. That is useful for dive companies that wish to verify the dive history of a diver,
- often doing away with the need to carry an original logbook
+ of dives, useful for dive companies wishing to verify the dive history of a diver,
+ and doing away with the need to carry an original logbook
when doing dives with dive companies.
</p>
</li>
@@ -3740,7 +3940,7 @@ instance <em>www.divelogs.de</em>.</p></div>
<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">9. Keeping a <em>Subsurface</em> dive log in the Cloud</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>For each diver, dive log information is highly important. Not only is it a record
-of diving activities for one&#8217;s own pleasure, but it’s important information required
+of diving activities for your pleasure, but it’s important information required
for admission to training courses or sometimes even diving sites. The
security of the dive log is critical. To have a dive log that is
resistant to failure of a home computer hard drive, loss or theft of equipment, the
@@ -3838,7 +4038,7 @@ including some cylinder pressures, deco ceilings and O<sub>2</sub>/He/N<sub>2</s
</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="_other_cloud_services">9.4. Other cloud services</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>If you prefers not to use the integrated cloud storage of dive logs (and
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If you prefer not to use the integrated cloud storage of dive logs (and
don&#8217;t need the web access), it’s simple to store
dive logs in the cloud using several of the existing facilities on the
Internet.
@@ -3928,14 +4128,14 @@ Under <em>Print options</em> select:
<li>
<p>
Printing only the dives selected from the dive list before
- activating the print dialogue by checking the box <em>Print only
- selected dives</em>. If this check box is <strong>not</strong> checked ALL dives in
+ activating the print dialogue by checking the box <em>Print only selected dives</em>. If this
+ check box is <strong>not</strong> checked ALL dives in
the <strong>Dive List</strong> panel are printed.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Printing in color, done by checking the box with _Print in color. If this check box
+Printing in color, done by checking the box with <em>Print in color</em>. If this check box
is not checked, printing is in black and white.
</p>
</li>
@@ -4035,7 +4235,8 @@ can be read and changed to different values. To begin, be sure the appropriate h
is installed for the dive computer (also required for downloading dives) and the device name of the dive computer is known.
See <a href="#_appendix_a_operating_system_specific_information_for_importing_dive _information_from_a_dive_computer">APPENDIX A</a> for information on how to do this.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Once the dive computer is connected to the <em>Subsurface</em> computer, select <em>File &#8594; Configure dive
-computer</em> from the <em>Main Menu</em>. Provide the appropriate device name in the text box at the
+computer</em> from the <em>Main Menu</em>. Select the appropriate device name (or mount point) in the
+dropdown list at the
top of the configuration panel and select the appropriate dive
computer model from the panel on the left-hand (see image below).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -4082,30 +4283,32 @@ computer model from the panel on the left-hand (see image below).</p></div>
<h2 id="S_Preferences">12. Setting user <em>Preferences</em> for <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several user-definable settings within <em>Subsurface</em>, found by selecting
-<em>File &#8594; Preferences</em>. The settings are in
-seven groups: <strong>Defaults</strong>, <strong>Units</strong>, <strong>Graph</strong>, <strong>Language</strong> and <strong>Network</strong>, <strong>Facebook</strong> and <strong>Georeference</strong>.
-All operate on the same principles: the user must specify settings that are to be changed, then
-save them using the <strong>Apply</strong> button. After applying all the new settings users can then
-leave the settings panel by selecting <strong>OK</strong>. If <strong>Discard</strong> is selected, changes to the preferences
-are not saved.</p></div>
+<em>File &#8594; Preferences</em>, mostly affecting the way in which <em>Subsurface</em>
+shows dive information to the user. The settings are in
+six panels: <em>Defaults</em>, <em>Units</em>, <em>Graph</em>, <em>Language</em>, <em>Network</em>, and <em>Georeference</em>,
+all of which operate on the same principles: specified settings can be applied to the display of
+the dive log by selecting <em>Apply</em>. At this stage, any new settings only apply to the present
+session and are not saved. In order to apply
+new settings permanently, select the <em>Save</em> button. If you do not wish to
+apply the new preferences, select <em>Cancel</em>.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="_defaults">12.1. Defaults</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several settings in the <strong>Defaults</strong> panel:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>There are several headings in the <strong>Defaults</strong> panel:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences defaults page" />
+<img src="images/Pref1_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences defaults page" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Lists and tables</strong>: Here you can specify the font type and font size of the
- <strong>Dive Table</strong> panel: By decreasing the font size of the <strong>Dive Table</strong>, you can see more dives on a screen.
+<strong>Lists and tables</strong>: Specify the font type and font size of the
+ <strong>Dive Table</strong> panel: decreasing the font size allows one to see more dives on a screen.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Dives</strong>: For the <em>Default Dive File</em> you need to specify the directory and
+<strong>Dives</strong>: For the <em>Default Dive Log File</em> specify the directory and
file name of your
electronic dive log book. This is a file with filename extension of either <em>.xml</em> or <em>.ssrf</em>. When
launched, <em>Subsurface</em> will automatically load the specified dive log book. There are three options:
@@ -4118,8 +4321,7 @@ are not saved.</p></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Local default file</em>: When checked, <em>Subsurface</em> automatically loads a dive log from the local hard disk
- as described above.
+<em>Local default file</em>: When checked, <em>Subsurface</em> automatically loads a dive log from the local hard disk.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4140,7 +4342,7 @@ are not saved.</p></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Default cylinder</strong>: Specify the default cylinder listed in
+<strong>Default cylinder</strong>: From the dropdown list, select the default cylinder to be used in
the <strong>Equipment</strong> tab of the <strong>Notes</strong> panel.
</p>
</li>
@@ -4167,10 +4369,10 @@ are not saved.</p></div>
<h3 id="_units">12.2. Units</h3>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Units page" />
+<img src="images/Pref2_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Units page" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Here you can choose between metric and imperial units of depth, pressure,
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Choose between metric and imperial units of depth, pressure,
volume, temperature and mass. By selecting the Metric or Imperial radio button
at the top, you can specify that all units are in the chosen measurement system.
Alternatively, if you select the <strong>Personalize</strong> radio button, units can be selected
@@ -4183,80 +4385,111 @@ Choose the appropriate option.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="_graph">12.3. Graph</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel has three sections:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" id="S_CCR_options" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Graph page" />
+<img src="images/Pref4_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Graph page" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph" id="S_GradientFactors"><p>This panel allows two type of selections:</p></div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<div class="ulist" id="S_GradientFactors"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Show</strong>: Here you can specify the amount of information shown as part of
- the dive profile:
+<strong>Gas pressure display setup</strong>. Even though nitrogen and helium pressures are also included here, these items mainly pertain to oxygen management:
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-Thresholds: <em>Subsurface</em> can display the nitrogen, oxygen and the helium partial pressures during
- the dive, done by using the toolbar on the left hand side of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>
- panel. For each of these graphs you can specify a threshold value on the right-hand side of the
- Preferences panel. If any of the graphs go above the specified threshold level, the graph is
+<em>Thresholds</em>: <em>Subsurface</em> can display graphs of the nitrogen, oxygen and the helium
+ partial pressures during
+ the dive, activated using the toolbar on the left of the <strong>Dive Profile</strong>
+ panel. For each of these graphs, specify a threshold value. If any of the graphs go
+ above the specified threshold, the graph is
highlighted in red, indicating the particular partial pressure threshold has been exceeded.
+ The pO<sub>2</sub> threshold is probably the most important one and a value of 1.6 is commonly used.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-_Max pO<sub>2</sub> is used for calculating the MOD when displaying the maximum operative depth (MOD)
- for a dive. Specify an appropriate partial pressure. A value of 1.4 is commonly used.
+<em>pO<sub>2</sub> in calculating MOD</em> is used for calculating the maximum operative depth for a particular
+ nitrox or trimix gas mixture. A value of 1.4 is commonly used.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Draw dive computer reported ceiling red</em>: This checkbox does exactly what it says. By default
- the computer reported ceiling is shown in white.
- Not all dive computers report ceiling values. If the dive computer does report it, it may differ
- from the ceilings calculated by <em>Subsurface</em> because of the different algorithms and
- gradient factors, as well as the dynamic way a
- dive computer calculates ceilings during a dive.
+CCR Options: These options determine oxygen management for CCR dives:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Dive planner default setpoint</em>: Specify the O<sub>2</sub> setpoint for a
+ CCR dive plan. This determines the pO<sub>2</sub> maintained
+ during a particular dive. Setpoint changes during the dive can be added via the
+ profile context menu.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Show unused cylinders in Equipment Tab</em>: This checkbox allows display of information about unused cylinders when viewing the
-<strong>Equipment Tab</strong>. If this box is not checked, and if any cylinders entered using the <strong>Equipment Tab</strong> are not used (e.g. there
-was no gas switch to such a cylinder), then these cylinders are omitted from that list.
+<em>CCR: Show setpoints when viewing pO2:</em> With this checkbox activated, the pO<sub>2</sub>
+ graph on the dive profile has an overlay in red which indicates the CCR setpoint
+ values. See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Show average depth</em>: If this box is checked, the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel contains a grey line that shows
- the mean depth of the dive, up to any time instant during the dive. Normally this is a u-shaped line indicating the deepest mean depth just before
- ascent.
+<em>CCR: Show individual O<sub>2</sub> sensor values when viewing pO<sub>2</sub>:</em> Show the pO<sub>2</sub>
+ values associated with each of the individual oxygen sensors of a CCR system.
+ See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Misc</strong>:
+<strong>Ceiling display setup</strong>. These settings mostly deal with nitrogen and helium management
+ by determining how the decompression ceiling (ascent ceiling) is calculated and displayed:
</p>
-<div class="ulist" id="GradientFactors_Ref"><ul>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Draw dive computer reported ceiling red</em>: This checkbox does exactly what it says. By default
+ the computer reported ceiling is shown in white.
+ Not all dive computers report ceiling values. If the dive computer does report it, it may differ
+ from the ceilings calculated by <em>Subsurface</em> because of the different algorithms and
+ gradient factors, as well as the dynamic way a
+ dive computer calculates ceilings during a dive.
+</p>
+</li>
<li>
<p>
-Gradient Factors (GFLow and GFHigh):* Set the <em>gradient factors</em> used while diving. GF_Low is
- the gradient factor at depth and GF_High is used just below the surface.
+<em>Algorithm for calculating ceiling</em>. Choose between the Bühlmann Z1H-L16
+ decompression model and the VPM-B model:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>VPM-B</em>: Provide a conservatism level for calculating the VPM-B ceiling. Values between 0
+ (least conservative) and 4 (most conservative) are valid.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Bühlmann: Set the <em>gradient factors</em> (GFlow and GFHigh) for calculcating the deco ceiling following
+ the ZH-L16 algorithm. GF_Low is the gradient factor at depth and GF_High is used at the surface.
At intermediate depths gradient factors between GF_Low and GF_High are used.
- Gradient factors add conservatism to nitrogen exposure during a dive, in a
- similar way that many dive computers have a conservative setting. The lower
+ Gradient factors add conservatism to nitrogen and helium exposure during a dive, in a
+ similar way that many dive computers have a conservatism setting. The lower
the value of a gradient factor, the more conservative the calculations are with
- respect to nitrogen loading and the deeper the ascent ceilings are. Gradient
+ respect to inert gas loading and the deeper the ceilings are. Gradient
factors of 20/60 are considered conservative and values of 70/90 are considered
- harsh. Checking the <strong>GFLow at max depth</strong> box causes GF_Low to be used at the
- deepest depth of a dive. If this box is not checked, GF_Low is applied at
- all depths deeper than the first deco stop. For more information see:
+ harsh.
+ In addition decide whether to check the <em>GFLow at max depth</em> box. If checked, GF_Low is used for the
+ deepest dive depth and linearly increased up to the GF_High value at the surface. If unchecked,
+ GF_Low is used between the deepest dive depth and the first deco stop, after which the
+ gradient factor linearly increases up to the GF_High value at the surface. For more information see:
</p>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
+</li>
<li>
<p>
<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
@@ -4271,45 +4504,44 @@ Gradient Factors (GFLow and GFHigh):* Set the <em>gradient factors</em> used whi
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>CCR: Show setpoints when viewing pO2:</em> With this checkbox activated, the pO<sub>2</sub>
- graph on the dive profile has an overlay in red which indicates the CCR setpoint
- values. See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
+<em>pSCR options</em>. These preferences determine how passive semi-closed circuit (pSCR) dives
+ are planned and how the pSCR deco ceiling is calculated:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist" id="GradientFactors_Ref"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Metabolic rate:</em> this is the
+ volume of oxygen used by a diver during a minute. Set this value for pSCR dive planning
+ and decompression calculations.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>CCR: Show individual O<sub>2</sub> sensor values when viewing pO<sub>2</sub>:</em> Show the pO<sub>2</sub>
- values associated with each of the individual oxygen sensors of a CCR system.
- See the section on <a href="#S_CCR_dives">Closed Circuit Rebreather dives</a>.
+<em>pSCR ratio:</em> The dilution ratio (or dump ratio) is the ratio of gas released to the
+ environment to that of the gas recirculated to the diver. A 1:10 ratio is commonly used.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Configuring dive planning using rebreather equipment:</strong>
+<strong>Misc</strong>
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Default CCR setpoint for dive planning:</em> Specify the O<sub>2</sub> setpoint for a
- CCR dive plan. This determines the pO<sub>2</sub> maintained
- during a particular dive. Setpoint changes during the dive can be added via the
- profile context menu.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-<em>pSCR O<sub>2</sub> metabolism rate:</em> For a semi-closed rebreather (pSCR) system, this is the
- volume of oxygen used by a diver during a minute. Set this value for pSCR dive planning
- and decompression calculations.
+<em>Show unused cylinders in Equipment Tab</em>: This checkbox allows display of information about unused cylinders when viewing the
+<strong>Equipment Tab</strong>. If this box is not checked, and if any cylinders entered using the <strong>Equipment Tab</strong> are not used (e.g. there
+was no gas switch to such a cylinder), then these cylinders are omitted from that list.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>pSCR ratio:</em> For pSCR equipment the dump ratio is the ratio of gas released to the
- environment to that of the gas recirculated to the diver. Set this value for a
- pSCR dive plan. A 1:10 ratio is commonly used.
+<em>Show mean depth</em>: If this box is checked, the <strong>Dive Profile</strong> panel contains a grey line that shows
+ the mean depth of the dive, up to any time instant during the dive. Normally this is a u-shaped line indicating the deepest mean depth just before
+ ascent.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
@@ -4321,17 +4553,17 @@ Gradient Factors (GFLow and GFHigh):* Set the <em>gradient factors</em> used whi
<div class="paragraph"><p>Choose a language that <em>Subsurface</em> will use.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref4_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Language page" />
+<img src="images/Pref3_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Language page" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>A checkbox lets you use the <em>System Default</em> language which in most cases
-will be the correct setting; with this <em>Subsurface</em> simply runs in the same
-language / country settings as the underlying operating system.
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Check the <em>System Default</em> language i.e. the language of the underlying operating system
+if this is appropriate. This is the default setting in <em>Subsurface</em>.
To change it, uncheck this checkbox and pick a language / country
combination from the list of locations. The <em>Filter</em> text box
-lists similar languages. For instance there are several system variants of English
+to list similar languages. For instance there are several system variants of English
or French. <strong>This particular preference requires a restart of <em>Subsurface</em> to take
effect</strong>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>In this section also specify appropriate date an time formats for showing dive details.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="_network">12.5. Network</h3>
@@ -4342,7 +4574,7 @@ connection to the Internet and by the Internet Service Provider (ISP) used.
Your ISP should provide the appropriate information.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref5_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Network page" />
+<img src="images/Pref5_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Preferences Network page" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>This dialogue has three sections:</p></div>
@@ -4355,7 +4587,7 @@ after which the IP address of the host and the appropriate port number should
be provided. If the proxy server uses authentication, the appropriate userID and
password are required so that <em>Subsurface</em> can automatically pass
through the proxy server to access the Internet. This information is usually obtained
-from one&#8217;s ISP.
+from your ISP.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4390,23 +4622,7 @@ from one&#8217;s ISP.
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Facebook">12.6. Facebook Access</h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>This panel lets you log into a Facebook account in order to transfer information
-from Subsurface to Facebook.</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Facebook login panel" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>If you provide a valid Facebook userID and password, a
-connection to Facebook is created. That connection is closed when one
-closing down Subsurface. Currently the checkbox labelled "Keep me logged in to Subsurface",
-on the login screen has no effect.
-See the section <a href="#S_facebook">Exporting dive profiles to Facebook</a>
-for more information.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_georeference">12.7. Georeference</h3>
+<h3 id="_georeference">12.6. Georeference</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> provides a geo-lookup service (that is, given the coordinates of a dive site) derived from
a click on the <strong>Dive Map panel</strong> at the bottom right of the <em>Subsurface</em> window, or from a GPS instrument or
from the <em>Subsurface</em> Companion app). A search on the Internet is done to find
@@ -4415,7 +4631,7 @@ Internet connection. The preference of the dive site name can be configured, e.g
or <em>City/State/Country</em> (see image below).</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/Pref7_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Facebook login panel" />
+<img src="images/Pref7_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Georeference panel" />
</div>
</div>
</div>
@@ -4426,7 +4642,7 @@ or <em>City/State/Country</em> (see image below).</p></div>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Dive planning is an advanced feature of <em>Subsurface</em>, accessed by selecting
<em>Log &#8594; Plan Dive</em> from the main menu. It allows calculation of
-nitrogen load during a dive by using the Bühlmann ZH-L16 algorithm with the addition
+inert gas load during a dive by using the Bühlmann ZH-L16 algorithm with the addition
of gradient factors as implemented by Erik Baker.</p></div>
<div class="sidebarblock">
<div class="content">
@@ -4538,7 +4754,7 @@ In the table labelled <em>Available Gases</em>, add the information of the cylin
as well as the gas composition within that cylinder. This is done in a similar way as for
<a href="#cylinder_definitions">providing cylinder data for dive logs</a>. Choose the cylinder type by
double clicking the cylinder type and using the dropdown list, then specify the work
- pressure of this cylinder. By leaving the oxygen concentration (O2%) filed empty,
+ pressure of this cylinder. By leaving the oxygen concentration (O2%) field empty,
the cylinder is assumed to contain air. Otherwise enter the oxygen and/or helium
concentration in the boxes provided in this dialogue. Add additional cylinders by using the
"+" icon to the top right-hand of the dialogue.
@@ -4546,6 +4762,33 @@ In the table labelled <em>Available Gases</em>, add the information of the cylin
</li>
<li>
<p>
+The <em>Available Gases</em> table includes three gas depth fields, labelled:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Deco switch at: the switch depth for deco gases. Unless overridden by the user, this will be
+ automatically calculated based on the Deco pO₂ preference (default 1.6 bar)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Bot. MOD: the gas Maximum Operating Depth (MOD) if it is used as a bottom mix. Automatically
+ calculated based on the Bottom pO₂ preference (default 1.4 bar). Editing this field will modify the
+ O₂% according to the depth set. Set to <em>'*</em>' to calculate the best O₂% for the dive maximum depth.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+MND: the gas Maximum Narcotic Depth (MND). Automatically calculated based on the Best Mix END
+ preference (default 30m / 98 ft). Editing this field will modify the He% according to the depth set.
+ Set to <em>'*</em>' to calculate the best He% for the dive maximum depth.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
The profile of the planned dive can be created in two ways:
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
@@ -4671,7 +4914,7 @@ These dives are planned in three stages:</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>a) Nitrogen management</strong>: This is done by specifying the rates for descent and ascent,
as well as the deco model (GFLow, GFHigh or Conservatism level) under the headings <em>Rates</em> and <em>Planning</em>
to the bottom left of the planning screen. Two deco models are supported the Bühlmann model and the VPM-B
-model. Select one of the two models. When selecting the Bühlmann model, the gradient factors (GF_high and GF_low
+model. Select one of the two models. When selecting the Bühlmann model, the gradient factors (GFhigh and GFlow
need to be specified. Initially, the GFHigh and GFLow values in the <em>Preferences</em>
panel of <em>Subsurface</em> is used. If these are changed within the planner (see <em>Gas Options</em> within
the planner), the new values are
@@ -4681,7 +4924,8 @@ A very low GFLow value brings on decompression stops early during the dive.
** For more information about Gradient factors, see the section on <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Gradient Factor Preference settings</a>.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If the VPM-B model is selected, the Conservatism_level needs to be specified on a scale of 0 (least conservative) to 4 (most conservative).
This model tends to give deco stops at deeper levels than the Bühlmann model and often results in slightly shorter
-dive durations than the Bühlmann model. When selecting one of these models, keep in mind they are NOT exact physiological models but
+dive durations than the Bühlmann model, albeit at the cost of higher tissue compartment pressures in the slow tissues.
+When selecting one of these models, keep in mind they are NOT exact physiological models but
only mathematical models that appear to work in practice.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>For more information external to this manual see:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
@@ -4703,7 +4947,7 @@ An excellent non-technical review that discusses both the Bühlmann deco model a
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>The ascent rate is critical for nitrogen off-gassing at the end of the dive and is specified
-for several depth ranges, using the average (or mean) depth as a yardstick. The mean depth
+for several depth ranges, using the mean depth as a yardstick. The mean depth
of the dive plan is shown by a light grey line on the dive profile. Ascent rates
at deeper levels are often in the range of 8-12 m/min, while ascent rates near the surface are
often in the range of 4-9 m/min. The descent rate is also specified. If the option <em>Drop to first depth</em>
@@ -4712,18 +4956,17 @@ in the <em>Rates</em> section of the dive setup.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>b) Oxygen management</strong>: In the <strong>Gas Options</strong> part of the dive specification, the maximum partial
pressure for oxygen needs to be specified for the
bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom po2</em>) as well as for the decompression part of the dive (<em>deco po2</em>).
-The most commonly
-used values are 1.4 bar for the bottom part of the dive and 1.6 bar for any decompression
+Commonly used values are 1.4 bar for the bottom part of the dive and 1.6 bar for any decompression
stages. Normally, a partial pressure of 1.6 bar is not exceeded. PO2 settings and the depth at which switching to a gas takes place can also be edited in the
<em>Available Gases</em> dialog. Normally the planner decides on switching to a new gas when, during
-ascent, the partial pressure of the new gas has increased to 1.6 bar.</p></div>
+ascent, the partial pressure of the new gas has decreased to 1.6 bar.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>c) Gas management</strong>: With open-circuit dives this is a primary
consideration. Divers need to keep within the limits of the amount of
gas within the dive
cylinder(s), allowing for an appropriate margin for a safe return to the surface, possibly
sharing with a buddy. Under the <em>Gas Options</em> heading, specify the best (but conservative) estimate
of your surface-equivalent air consumption (SAC, also termed RMV) in
-liters/min (for the time being, only SI units are supported). Specify the SAC during the
+liters/min (for the time being, only SI units are supported). Specify the SAC during the
bottom part of the dive (<em>bottom SAC</em>) as well as during the decompression or safety stops of the
dive (<em>deco SAC</em>). Values of 15-30 l/min are common. For good gas management, a guess
is not sufficient and you needs to
@@ -4734,18 +4977,18 @@ the limit of the gas supply but that an appropriate reserve is kept
for unforeseen circumstances.
For technical diving, this reserve can be up to 66% of the total available gas.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Now you can start the detailed time-depth planning of the dive. <em>Subsurface</em> offers an unique
-graphical interface for doing planning. Themechanics are
+graphical interface for doing planning. The mechanics are
similar to hand-entering a dive profile in the dive log part of <em>Subsurface</em>. Upon activating the
-planner, a default dive of depth 15 m for 40 min is offered in the blue design surface to the top
+planner, a default dive of depth 15 m for 20 min is offered in the blue design surface to the top
right hand of the screen. The white dots (waypoints) on the
profile can be dragged with a mouse. Create more waypoints by double-clicking on the profile
line and ensuring the profile reflects the intended dive. Drag the waypoints to represent
the depth and duration of the dive. It is NOT necessary to specify the ascent part of the dive
-since the planner calculates this, based on the settings that have been specified.
+since the planner calculates this, based on the existing settings.
If any of the management limits (for nitrogen, oxygen or gas) are exceeded, the surface
above the dive profile changes from BLUE to RED.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Each waypoint on the dive profile creates a <em>Dive Planner Point</em> in the table on the
-left of the dive planner panel. Be sure the <em>Used Gas</em> value in each row
+left of the dive planner panel. Ensure the <em>Used Gas</em> value in each row
of that table corresponds to one of the gas mixtures specified in the <em>Available Gases</em> table.
Add new waypoints until the main features of the dive have been completed, e.g. the
bottom time segment and deep stops (if these are implemented). Leave the remaining
@@ -4753,7 +4996,7 @@ waypoints on the ascent to <em>Subsurface</em>. In most cases <em>Subsurface</em
computes additional way points in order to fulfill decompression requirements for that
dive. A waypoint can be moved by selecting it and by using the arrow keys.
The waypoints listed in the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialogue can be edited by hand in
-order to get a precise presentation of the dive plan. In fact, you can create the
+order to get a precise presentation of the dive plan. In fact, it is sometimes more easy to create the
whole dive profile by editing the <em>Dive Planner Points</em> dialog.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Show any changes in gas cylinder used by indicating gas changes as explained
in the section <a href="#S_CreateProfile">hand-creating a dive profile</a>. These changes should
@@ -4768,7 +5011,7 @@ is dived using a closed circuit rebreather (CCR). If the last manually entered
segment is a CCR segment, the decompression phase is computed assuming the diver
uses a CCR with the specified set-point. If the last segment (however
short) is on open circuit (OC, indicated by a zero set-point) the
-decompression is computed in OC mode. The planner only considers gas
+decompression is computed in OC mode and the planner only considers gas
changes in OC mode.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Below is an example of a dive plan to 45m using EAN26, followed by an ascent using EAN50
and using the settings as described above.</p></div>
@@ -4800,7 +5043,7 @@ the transitions are shown separately from the segment durations at a particular
<em>Open circuit</em> in the dropdown list.
The parameters of the pSCR dive can be set by selecting <em>File &#8594; Preferences &#8594; Graph</em>
from the main menu, where the gas consumption calculation takes into account the pSCR dump
-ratio (default 10:1) as well as the metabolism rate. The calculation also takes the oxygen drop
+ratio (default 1:10) as well as the metabolic rate. The calculation also takes the oxygen drop
accross the mouthpiece of the rebreather into account. If the
pO<sub>2</sub> drops below what is considered safe, a warning appears in the <em>Dive plan
details</em>. A typical pSCR configuration is with a single cylinder and one or more bail-out
@@ -4846,9 +5089,9 @@ so gas consumptions of 0 liters are the norm.</p></div>
other dive log. Within the <strong>Dive List</strong> there is no way to change a saved dive plan.
To change a dive plan, select it on the <strong>Dive List</strong>. Then, in the main menu,
select <em>Log &#8594; Re-plan dive</em>. This will open the selected dive plan within the dive planner,
-letting changes be made and saved as usual.</p></div>
+allowing changes to be made and saved as usual.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>In addition, there is the option "Save new". This keeps the original
-planned dive and adds a (possibly modified) copy to the dive list. If
+planned dive and adds a (possibly modified, - earlier dives are now taken into account -) copy to the dive list. If
that copy is saved with the same start time as the original, the two
dives are considered two versions of the same dive and do not
influence other each during decompression calculation (see next section).</p></div>
@@ -4861,7 +5104,7 @@ are specified appropriately in the top left-hand <em>Start Time</em> field. <em>
calculates the gas loading figures and the affect of the first dive is
evaluated on later dives.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>If you have just completed a long/deep dive and are planning
-another dive, then highlight, in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, the dive that has just been done
+another dive, then highlight, in the <strong>Dive List</strong>, the dive that has just been logged
then activate the planner. Depending on the start time of the planned dive,
the planner takes into account the gas loading during the completed dive
and plans accordingly.</p></div>
@@ -4910,12 +5153,17 @@ dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Open cloud storage</em> - Open the dive log previously saved in <a href="#S_Cloud_storage"><em>Cloud storage</em></a>.
+<em>Save</em> - Save the dive logbook currently open.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Save</em> - Save the dive logbook currently open.
+<em>Save as</em> - Save the current logbook under a different file name.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Open cloud storage</em> - Open the dive log previously saved in <a href="#S_Cloud_storage"><em>Cloud storage</em></a>.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4925,7 +5173,7 @@ dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<em>Save as</em> - Save the current logbook under a different file name.
+<em>Take cloud storage online</em> - <strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong><strong><strong></strong></strong>
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -4968,7 +5216,17 @@ dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_import">14.2. Import</h3>
+<h3 id="_edit">14.2. Edit</h3>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+The Edit option allows one to undo or redo an action, e.g. deleting dives.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect2">
+<h3 id="_import">14.3. Import</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -4997,7 +5255,7 @@ dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_log">14.3. Log</h3>
+<h3 id="_log">14.4. Log</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5056,7 +5314,7 @@ dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_view">14.4. View</h3>
+<h3 id="_view">14.5. View</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5108,7 +5366,7 @@ dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_share_on">14.5. Share on</h3>
+<h3 id="_share_on">14.6. Share on</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5118,7 +5376,7 @@ dealing with the appropriate operations.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_help">14.6. Help</h3>
+<h3 id="_help">14.7. Help</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5262,10 +5520,14 @@ the import settings as <code>/dev/ttyUSB3</code> which directs Subsurface to the
USB port.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Ensuring the user has write permission to the USB serial port:</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>On Unix-like operating systems the USB ports can only be accessed by users who
-are members
-of the <code>dialout</code> group. If one is not root, one may not be a member of
+are members special group that can be e.g.
+<code>dialout</code> or <code>uucp</code>. This can be verified by listing the appropriate
+device permissions e.g. by <code>ls -l /dev/ttyUSB0</code>. Note that the number in
+the file name depends on how many USB devices you have connected, and
+must be adjusted appropriately.
+If you are not root, you may not be a member of
that group and
-won&#8217;t be able to use the USB port. Let us assume one&#8217;s username is <em>johnB</em>.</p></div>
+won&#8217;t be able to use the USB port. Let us assume your username is <em>johnB</em>.</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5286,13 +5548,13 @@ among the different IDs.
<li>
<p>
Under some circumstances this change takes only effect (eg. on Ubuntu) after
-one logs out and then logs in again.
+you log out and then log in again.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>With the appropriate device name (e.g. <code>dev/ttyUSB3</code>) and with write permission
to the USB
-port, the dive computer interface can connect and one should be able to import
+port, the dive computer interface can connect and you should be able to import
dives.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
@@ -5425,7 +5687,7 @@ hci0: Type: BR/EDR Bus: USB
<pre><code>sudo hciconfig hci1 down</code></pre>
</div></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Next step is to <em>trust</em> and <em>pair</em> the dive computer. On distros with Bluez 5, such as Fedora 22,
-one can use a tool called <code>blutootctl</code>, which will bring up its own command prompt.</p></div>
+you can use a tool called <code>blutootctl</code>, which will bring up its own command prompt.</p></div>
<div class="literalblock">
<div class="content">
<pre><code>bluetoothctl
@@ -5488,7 +5750,7 @@ Scanning ...
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>If one omits it, channel 1 is assumed. Based on a limited number of user reports,
+<div class="paragraph"><p>If you omit it, channel 1 is assumed. Based on a limited number of user reports,
the appropriate channel for the dive computer is probably:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
@@ -6415,6 +6677,22 @@ cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">otu</p></td>
<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) OTU value for the dive</p></td>
</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">sumWeight</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) the summed weight of all used weight systems</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">startPressure</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) the start pressure</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">endPressure</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) the end pressure</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">firstGas</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) first used gas</p></td>
+</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
@@ -6674,7 +6952,7 @@ cannot be salvaged after being overwritten by new dives.</p></div>
<div id="footnotes"><hr /></div>
<div id="footer">
<div id="footer-text">
-Last updated 2015-12-16 06:35:54 PST
+Last updated 2016-11-07 21:11:40 PST
</div>
</div>
</body>
diff --git a/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git b/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git
index 0d555636c..01fa88cd9 100644
--- a/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git
+++ b/Documentation/user-manual_es.html.git
@@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ visualizarlo desde cualquier parte, simplemente usando un navegador web?
Intel (OS/X) y muchas distribuciones de Linux. <em>Subsurface</em> puede compilarse
para muchas otras plataformas de hardware y entornos de software en los que
estén disponibles Qt y libdivecomputer.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El ámbito de este documento es el uso del programa <em>Subsurface</em>. Para instalar
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Este manual explica como utilizar el programa <em>Subsurface</em>. Para instalar
el software, consulta la página Descargas en <a href="http://subsurface-divelog.org/">la
web</a>. Por favor, comenta los problemas que tengas con este programa enviando un
mail a <a href="mailto:subsurface@subsurface-divelog.org">nuestra lista de correo</a> e informa de
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ anterior o posterior aparición de la palabra buscada.
</ul></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/usermanualfunctions.jpg" alt="User manual functions" />
+<img src="images/UserManualSearch.jpg" alt="User manual functions" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ anterior o posterior aparición de la palabra buscada.
<em>LINK ANTERIOR/POSTERIOR</em>. Se puede navegar entre links (palabras resaltadas
que permiten saltar a secciones específicas del manual) haciendo clic-derecho
en el texto. Esto muestra un menú contextual que permite navegar a links
-del manual visitados anteriormente (ver imagen anterior). Por ejemplo, si se
+del manual visitados anteriormente (ver imagen a continuación). Por ejemplo, si se
ha seleccionado un link del manual, la opción <em>Atrás</em> muestra el texto del
último link seleccionado. A la inversa, la opción <em>Adelante</em> permite saltar
al texto visitado antes de usar la opción <em>Atrás</em>. La opción <em>Recargar</em> hace
@@ -549,6 +549,11 @@ que se recargue el manual completo en la ventana.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/UserManualLinksBack.jpg" alt="User manual functions" />
+</div>
+</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
@@ -579,8 +584,8 @@ Unity). Los cuatro paneles son:</p></div>
<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic">
<li>
<p>
-La <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> abajo a la izquierda. Contienen una lista de todos
-los buceos en tu registro. Puedes seleccionar y resaltar una inmersión de la
+La <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> abajo a la izquierda, muestra una lista de todos
+los buceos de tu registro. Puedes seleccionar y resaltar una inmersión de la
lista haciendo clic sobre ella. En casi todos los casos también se pueden
utilizar las teclas de cursor arriba/abajo para cambiar de inmersión. La Lista
de Inmersiones es una herramienta importante para manipular un diario de
@@ -591,7 +596,7 @@ inmersiones.
<p>
El <strong>Mapa</strong> abajo a la derecha, muestra los lugares de buceo del usuario en un
mapamundi y aparece centrado en el punto de la última inmersión seleccionada de
-la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>.
+la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>. El mapa puede hacerse más grande o más pequeño.
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -605,7 +610,8 @@ todas las inmersiones resaltadas.
<li>
<p>
El <strong>Perfil de la inmersión</strong> arriba a la derecha, muestra un perfil gráfico
-del buceo seleccionado en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>.
+del buceo seleccionado en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>. Se puede hacer zoom en el
+perfil para obtener una visión mas detallada.
</p>
</li>
</ol></div>
@@ -627,8 +633,8 @@ inmersiones seleccionadas).</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El usuario puede elegir cual de los cuatro paneles se mostrará seleccionando la
-opción <strong>Vista</strong> en el menú principal, la cual le presentará varias opciones de
-visualización:</p></div>
+opción <strong>Vista</strong> en el menú principa1. Esta selección presentará varias opciones
+de visualización:</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Todo</strong>: muestra los cuatro paneles como en la captura de pantalla de arriba.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>: Solo muestra la lista de buceos.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Perfil</strong>: Muestra solo el perfil de inmersión del buceo seleccionado.</p></div>
@@ -638,7 +644,7 @@ estadísticas para todas las resaltadas.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Como muchas otras funciones que pueden accederse desde el Menú Principal, estas
opciones también pueden lanzarse utilizando atajos de teclado. Los atajos para
un sistema en particular se muestran con un subrallado en las entradas del menú.
-Ya que los diferentes Sistemas Operativos y el lenguaje seleccionado por el
+Puesto que los diferentes Sistemas Operativos y el lenguaje seleccionado por el
usuario pueden hacer que <em>Subsurface</em> utilice diferentes atajos, no intentaremos
listarlos en este manual.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Al iniciar el programa por primera vez no muestra ninguna información. Esto se
@@ -696,6 +702,12 @@ Software propietario distribuido por los fabricantes de los ordenadores de
Ver <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importar información de inmersiones de otras fuentes u otros formatos de datos</a>.
</p>
</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+Hojas de cálculo o archivos CSV que contienen perfiles de inmersión.
+ Ver <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importar inmersiones en formato CSV desde ordenadores u otro software de buceo</a>
+</p>
+</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="S_EnterData">5.1. Introducir información de buceo a mano</h3>
@@ -731,9 +743,9 @@ se esté en modo de edición.</p></div>
inmersión hayan sido rellenadas. Cuando se introduzcan inmersiones a mano,
deberían haberse completado las pestañas <em>Información</em>, <em>Equipo</em> y <em>Perfil</em>
antes de guardar la información. Al seleccionar el botón <em>Aplicar cambios</em>, se guarda
-en memoria una copia local de la información. Al salir de <em>Subsurface</em>, el
-programa preguntará de nuevo, esta vez si se guarda el diario completo en el
-disco o no.</p></div>
+en memoria una copia local de la información, pero no se escribe en el disco.
+Al salir de <em>Subsurface</em>, el programa preguntará de nuevo, esta vez si se
+guarda el diario completo en el disco o no.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="S_CreateProfile">5.1.1. Crear un perfil de inmersión</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>EL <strong>Perfil de la Inmersión</strong> (una representación gráfica de la profundidad de
@@ -921,8 +933,7 @@ Ahora pulsar el botón <em>Descargar</em>.
paciente. El diálogo <em>Descarga</em> muestra una barra de progreso en la parte
inferior de la ventana (en algunos ordenadores de buceo la información del
progreso puede ser imprecisa al no poder determinarse cuantos datos había hasta
- haberse descargado). Tras una descarga correcta, aparecerá el diálogo <strong>B</strong> de
- la imagen anterior. Las inmersiones descargadas aparecen en una tabla en el
+ haberse descargado). Las inmersiones descargadas aparecen en una tabla en el
lado derecho del diálogo. Cada inmersión se sitúa en una fila en la que se
muestra la fecha, la duración y la profundidad. Junto a cada buceo hay una
casilla seleccionable. Marca todas las inmersiones que deban trasladarse a la
@@ -1289,10 +1300,10 @@ El usuario puede encontrar las coordenadas en el mapamundi situado abajo a la
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Se pueden obtener las coordenadas desde la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion si se
- dispone de un dispositivo android o iPhone con GPS y se guardaron las
- coordenadas del punto de buceo usando ese dispositivo.
- <a href="#S_Companion">Pulsa aquí para más información</a>
+Se pueden obtener las coordenadas desde la apps <em>Subsurface Companion</em> o
+ <em>Subsurface mobile</em> si se dispone de un dispositivo android o iPhone con
+ GPS y se guardaron las coordenadas del punto de buceo usando ese
+ dispositivo. <a href="#S_iCompanion">Pulsa aquí para más información</a>
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1544,13 +1555,11 @@ guardar en caso de no haberlo hecho antes.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
<h3 id="_importar_informacion_de_inmersiones_de_otras_fuentes_u_otros_formatos_de_datos">5.3. Importar información de inmersiones de otras fuentes u otros formatos de datos</h3>
-<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>Si el usuario bucea desde hace algún tiempo, es posible que bastantes
-inmersiones hayan sido registradas usando otro software. No es necesario teclear
-de nuevo esta información ya que, probablemente, estos diarios puedan importarse
-a <em>Subsurface</em>. <em>Subsurface</em> puede importar un amplio abanico de diarios de
-otros softwares de registro. Mientras que algún software se soporta nativamente,
-en otros casos el usuario debe exportar el(los) diario(s) a un
-formato intermedio para que pueda ser importado a <em>Subsurface</em>.
+<div class="paragraph" id="S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs"><p>Muchos buceadores guardan sus registros utilizando el software propietario
+proporcionado por el fabricante de su ordenador de buceo. <em>Subsurface</em> puede importar un amplio abanico de diarios de otros softwares de registro.
+Mientras que algún software se soporta nativamente, en otros casos el usuario
+debe exportar el(los) diario(s) a un formato intermedio para que pueda ser
+importado a <em>Subsurface</em>.
Actualmente, <em>Subsurface</em> soporta importar archivos <em>CSV</em> de diferentes origenes.
Los archivos de APD LogViewer, XP5, Sensus y Seabear están preconfigurados,
pero dado que es flexible, los usuarios pueden configurar sus propias
@@ -1565,8 +1574,8 @@ en la actualidad.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si el formato del otro software está soportado nativamente en <em>Subsurface,
debería ser suficiente con seleccionar bien _Importar&#8594;Importar archivos de
registro</em>, bien <em>Archivo&#8594;Abrir registro</em> . <em>Subsurface</em> soporta directamente
-los formatos de datos de muchos ordenadores de buceo, incluyendo Suunto y
-Shearwater.</p></div>
+los formatos de datos de muchos ordenadores de buceo, incluyendo Suunto,
+Shearwater y algunos equipos de rebreathers.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Al importar inmersiones, <em>Subsurface</em> intenta detectar múltiples registros del
mismo buceo y mezcla la información lo mejor que puede. Si no existen problemas
con las zonas horarias (u otras razones que hagan que la hora de comienzo de las
@@ -1645,7 +1654,7 @@ JDiveLog
</li>
<li>
<p>
-Suunto Dive Manager (DM3 y DM4)
+Suunto Dive Manager (DM3, DM4 y DM5)
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -1746,8 +1755,8 @@ de cálculo a <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
<h4 id="S_ImportingCSVDives">5.3.6. Importar inmersiones en formato <em>CSV</em> desde ordenadores u otro software</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Se puede visualizar un archivo <em>CSV</em> usando un editor de textos ordinario. Se
-organiza, normalmente, en una sola línea que proporciona las cabeceras (o
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Un archivvo <em>CSV</em> se puede visualizar utilizando un editor de textos ordinario.
+Se organiza, normalmente, en una sola línea que proporciona las cabeceras (o
<em>nombres de campo</em> o <em>encabezamientos</em>) de las columnas de datos, seguidos por
los datos a un registro (inmersión en nuestro caso) por línea.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay dos tipos de archivo <em>CSV</em> que pueden importarse en <em>Subsurface</em>:</p></div>
@@ -1930,15 +1939,140 @@ asegurarse de que el resto funciona.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Companion">5.4. Importar coordenadas GPS con la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion para teléfonos móviles</h3>
+<h3 id="_importar_coordenadas_de_buceo_desde_un_dispositivo_movil_con_gps">5.4. Importar coordenadas de buceo desde un dispositivo movil con GPS</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Un smartphone con GPS incorporado puede utilizarse para guardar las
+ubicaciones de las inmersiones. Esto se hace como sigue:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>1) Llevar el dispositivo móvil en el barco de buceo o vida abordo, para
+recoger automáticamente coordenadas.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>2) Subir las coordenadas desde el dispositivo móvil al servidor de internet de
+Subsurface.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>3) Sincronizar los buceos de la lista de <em>Subsurface</em> con las coordenadas del
+servidor de internet.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> dispone de dos herramientas para hacer esta tarea:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+La <em>app Subsurface companion</em> (Android e iOS)
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+La <em>app Subsurface-mobile</em> (Android e iOS)
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Ambas aplicaciones efectuan la recogida de coordenadas y la sincronización con
+inmersiones de la lista. Sin embargo, la app companion no está siendo
+desarrollada y ha sido reeemplazada por la app <em>Subsurface-mobile</em>. Mientras
+que la app companion servía exclusivamente para recoger coordenadas y hacerlas
+disponibles para la versión de sobremesa de <em>Subsurface</em>, <em>Subsurface-mobile</em>
+efectua muchas de las funciones de la versión de sobremesa, incluyendo la
+visualización y gestión de de la información de buceo. A continuación se
+describen los tres pasos mencionados anteriormente para cada una de las apps
+moviles.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Para información sobre el uso de <em>Subsurface companion</em>, pulsa click <a href="#S_iCompanion"><em>aquí</em></a>.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_guardar_y_utilizar_coordenadas_gps_utilizando_em_subsurface_mobile_em">5.4.1. Guardar y utilizar coordenadas GPS utilizando <em>Subsurface-mobile</em></h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_instalar_em_subsurface_mobile_em">Instalar <em>Subsurface-mobile</em></h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Busca <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> en Google Play e instálala en el dispositivo
+Android. La app is gratuita. La versión para iOS es experimental, actualmente.
+<em>Subsurface-mobile</em> tiene un extenso manual de usuario accesible desde la app.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_crear_una_cuenta_de_em_subsurface_mobile_em">Crear una cuenta de <em>Subsurface-mobile</em></h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Este tópico se explica en profundidaad en el manual de <em>Subsurface-mobile</em>. En
+la pantalla de credenciales de <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> introduce una dirección de
+correo electrónico y la clave de usuario que habilita el acceso. Se remitirá
+un PIN desde el servidor de Subsurface al correo electrónico facilitado.
+Introduce el PIN en el campo de texto correspondiente de la pantalla
+Credenciales (ver imagen a continuación). El servidor de internet de
+<em>Subsurface</em> notificará al usuario que ha quedado registrado.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>N.B.:</strong> Para poder crear una cuenta de usuario, el dispositivo movil debe
+tener acceso a internet a través de internet o de una red telefónica.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/MobileCredentials.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Subsurface-mobile, pantalla de credenciales" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_configurar_la_recogida_automastica_de_coordenadas">Configurar la recogida automástica de coordenadas</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Activar el menú principal de <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> seleccionando el botón
+"hamburguesa" en la parte inferior izquierda de la pantalla (ver imagen
+anterior), luego seleccionar <em>GPS</em>&#8594;_Preferencias_ (ver imagen a
+continuación). La recogida de posiciones se efectua en segundo plano
+utilzando dos ajustes:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Tiempo límite</em> (minutos). La app intentará obtener una posición cada X
+minutos.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+<em>Distancia límite</em> (metros). Distancia mínima entre dos posiciones.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>¿Como se recogen las coordenadas GPS?</strong> Suponiendo que el buceadror ajusta 5
+minutos y 50 metros en la pantalla de preferencias, la app tomará una posición
+en el punto actual, seguida por otra cada 5 minutos <strong>o</strong> cada vez que nos
+desplacemos más de 50 metros de la posición anterior, lo que ocurra primero.
+Si las siguentes posiciones se encuentran en el radio de 50 metros indicado,
+las posiciones no se guardan. Si el buceador no se mueve, solo se guardará la
+primera posición. Si el buceador se mueve, se obtendrá una traza de la ruta
+seguida, al guardarse las posiciones cada 50 metros.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_activar_la_recogida_automatica_de_posiciones_gps">Activar la recogida automática de posiciones GPS</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El menú principal de <em>Subsurface-mobile</em> tiene una casilla seleccionable en la
+parte inferior izquierda etiquetada "Activar servicio de posicionamiento" (ver
+imagen a continuación) Al seleccionar la casilla, el servicio se inicia y
+comienza la recogida automática de posiciones.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/MobileMenu.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Subsurface-mobile menú principal" />
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_despues_de_la_inmersion_detener_la_grabacion_automatica_de_gps">Despues de la inmersión, detener la grabación automática de GPS</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Desactiva la casilla seleccionada anteriormente.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_subir_las_posiciones_gps_al_servidor_de_internet_de_em_subsurface_em">Subir las posiciones GPS al servidor de internet de <em>Subsurface</em></h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>N.B.</strong> La subida de posiciones GPS al servidor de internet, solo puede hacerse
+si se dispone de una conexión decente, vía red telefónica o wifi. Si la red no
+está disponible desde el punto de buceo, la subida de posiciones solo podrá
+tener lugar cuando se haya restablecido la conexión.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Desde el menú principal de <em>Subsurface-mobile</em>, selecciona <em>GPS</em>&#8594;_Subir datos
+GPS_. Comprueba el indicador en la parte de arriba de la pantalla que indica
+la transferencia de información.</p></div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_aplicar_las_posiciones_guardadas_a_las_inmersiones_de_la_lista">Aplicar las posiciones guardadas a las inmersiones de la lista</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> aplica la primera posición GPS recogida tras el comienzo de la
+inmersión (hora que se obtiene del ordenador de buceo o de la información
+introducida a mano) y antes del fin de la inmersión. Estas coordenadas se
+muestran en el campo correspondiente del panel de Lugar de Inmersión, para
+cada buceo.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El <a href="https://subsurface-divelog.org/documentation/subsurface-mobile-user-manual">manual de usuario de <em>Subsurface-mobile</em></a>
+(accesible desde la app) contiene instrucciones detalladas para efectuar la
+recogida, subida, gestión y sincronizado de estas información.</p></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_iCompanion">5.4.2. Importar coordenadas GPS con la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion para teléfonos móviles</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Utilizando la app <em>Subsurface</em> Companion en un dispositivo Android o <a href="#S_iphone"><em>iPhone</em></a>
con GPS, se pueden pasar automáticamente las coordenadas de los
puntos de buceo al registro de <em>Subsurface</em>. La app Companion guarda las
ubicaciones de buceo en un servidor dedicado basado en internet. <em>Subsurface</em>
puede recoger las coordenadas desde este servidor.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para hacer esto:</p></div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_crear_una_cuenta_para_la_app_companion">5.4.1. Crear una cuenta para la app Companion</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_crear_una_cuenta_para_la_app_companion">Crear una cuenta para la app Companion</h5>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -1958,8 +2092,8 @@ Descargar la app desde
</li>
</ul></div>
</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_utilizar_em_subsurface_em_companion_en_un_smartphone_android">5.4.2. Utilizar <em>Subsurface</em> companion en un smartphone Android</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_utilizar_em_subsurface_em_companion_en_un_smartphone_android">Utilizar <em>Subsurface</em> companion en un smartphone Android</h5>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La primera vez que se utiliza, la app tiene tres opciones:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
@@ -1996,9 +2130,7 @@ principal en el propio <em>Subsurface</em>.
Esto facilitará la sincronización entre <em>Subsurface</em> y la app Companion.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_crear_nuevas_ubicaciones_de_buceo">5.4.3. Crear nuevas ubicaciones de buceo</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Crear nuevas ubicaciones de buceo</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Ahora se está preparado para tomar una posición de buceo y enviarla al servidor.
La pantalla de Android se verá como lo imagen de abajo a la izquierda (<strong>A</strong>),
pero sin ninguna inmersión.</p></div>
@@ -2041,9 +2173,7 @@ Importar desde archivos GPX: El dispositivo android buscará archivos .gpx y
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_listas_de_ubicaciones_de_buceo">5.4.4. Listas de ubicaciones de buceo</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Listas de ubicaciones de buceo</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pantalla principal muestra una lista de ubicaciones de buceo, cada una con un
nombre, fecha y hora (ver <strong>A</strong> debajo). Algunas posiciones pueden tener una
flechita sobre la casilla de selección, lo que indica que necesitan remitirse al
@@ -2080,9 +2210,7 @@ Maps: Muestra el punto de buceo sobre un mapa.
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Tras editar y guardar la posición de buceo (ver <strong>C</strong> abajo), se necesita subirla
al servidor, como se explicará a continuación.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_subir_puntos_de_buceo">5.4.5. Subir puntos de buceo</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Subir puntos de buceo</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay varias formas de enviar los buceos al servidor; la más fácil es simplemente
seleccionar la inmersión (ver la imagen <strong>A</strong> abajo) y luego pulsar la flecha
arriba a la derecha de la pantalla.</p></div>
@@ -2103,13 +2231,10 @@ significa exactamente lo que se supone: borra los puntos de buceo seleccionados.
<div class="paragraph"><p>Después de un viaje de buceo usando Companion, todos los puntos de inmersión
estarán listos para ser descargados a un diario de <em>Subsurface</em> (ver a
continuación).</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_ajustes_de_la_companion_app">5.4.6. Ajustes de la Companion app</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Ajustes de la Companion app</strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Seleccionar la opción Settings del menú, resulta en la imagen B de arriba a la
derecha.</p></div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_server_and_account">Server and account</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Server and account</em></p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -2124,9 +2249,7 @@ derecha.</p></div>
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_synchronization">Synchronization</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Synchronization</em></p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -2142,9 +2265,7 @@ derecha.</p></div>
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_background_service">Background service</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Background service</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>En vez de tomar una sola ubicación de buceo, los usuarios pueden dejar el
servicio ejecutándose en segundo plano en tu dispositivo android, tomando
continuamente posiciones GPS</p></div>
@@ -2183,9 +2304,7 @@ mueve, puede llegar a tener una traza de su viaje al guardar una ubicación cada
50 metros.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_other">Other</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Other</em></p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -2204,33 +2323,24 @@ mueve, puede llegar a tener una traza de su viaje al guardar una ubicación cada
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_search">Search</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Search</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se utiliza para buscar en las ubicaciones de buceo guardadas, por nombre o por
fecha y hora.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_start_service">Start service</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Start service</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Inicia el servicio en segundo plano siguiendo los ajustes previamente definidos.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_disconnect">Disconnect</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Disconnect</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Esta opción está mal nombrada. "Desconecta" la app del servidor reseteando el
DIVERID en la app, y retorna a la primera pantalla desde la que se puede crear
una cuenta, reactivar el DIVERID o volver a poner el del usuario. Desconectar
puede ser útil si se desea descargar a un dispositivo android posiciones de otro
buceador registrado o enviar la posición actual al servidor con el ID de otro
buceador registrado.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect4">
-<h5 id="_send_all_locations">Send all locations</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Send all locations</em></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Esta opción envía todas las posiciones guardadas en el dispositivo android al
servidor.</p></div>
</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_iphone">5.4.7. Usar la app Subsurface companion en un <em>iPhone</em> para registra puntos de buceo</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="S_iphone">Usar la app Subsurface companion en un <em>iPhone</em> para registra puntos de buceo</h5>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El interfaz de iPhone es bastante simple. Se necesita introducir la ID de
usuario (obtenida durante el registro) en el espacio reservado para ello, luego
seleccionar "Dive in" (ver parte izquierda de la imágen de abajo) y se empieza
@@ -2255,9 +2365,7 @@ manual.</p></div>
inmersión de la lista y clicando en el nombre. No hay otros campos editables.
La lista se sube automáticamente desde el <em>iPhone</em> al servicio web y no hay
opción a hacerlo manualmente.</p></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_descargar_ubicaciones_de_buceo_al_diario_en_em_subsurface_em">5.4.8. Descargar ubicaciones de buceo al diario en <em>Subsurface</em></h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Descargar ubicaciones de buceo al diario en <em>Subsurface</em></strong></p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay que descargar a <em>Subsurface</em> las inmersiones del ordenador de buceo, o
crearlas manualmente, antes de obtener las coordenadas del servifor. El diálogo
de descarga se puede obtener vía <em>Ctrl+G</em> o desde el menú principal de
@@ -2328,27 +2436,20 @@ También tendría sentido proporcionar nombres significativos a las
</div>
</div>
</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_LoadImage">6. El cargador de fotografías de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
-<div class="sectionbody">
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores (si no la mayoría) llevan consigo una cámara y toman
-fotografías durante sus inmersiones. Sería interesante poder asociar cada
-fotografía con una inmersión concreta. <em>Subsurface</em> nos permite cargar fotos en
-una inmersión. Las fotos se superponen en el perfil de la inmersión, desde donde
-pueden visualizarse.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_cargar_fotos_y_sincronizar_la_camara_con_el_ordenador_de_buceo">6.1. Cargar fotos y sincronizar la cámara con el ordenador de buceo</h3>
+<h3 id="S_LoadImage">5.5. El cargador de fotografías de <em>Subsurface</em></h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores (si no la mayoría) toman fotografías durante sus inmersiones.
+<em>Subsurface</em> nos permite almacenar y mostrar fotogrfías de cada inmersión. Las
+fotos se superponen en el perfil de la inmersión, en los momentos donde se
+tomaron y pueden visualizarse desde allí.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_cargar_fotos_y_sincronizar_la_camara_con_el_ordenador_de_buceo">5.5.1. Cargar fotos y sincronizar la cámara con el ordenador de buceo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se selecciona una inmersión o un grupo de ellas en la lista. Luego se hace
-clic-derecho en la selección y se elige la opción <em>Carga imagenes</em>:</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/LoadImage1_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opción de carga de imágenes" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Aparecerá el navegador de archivos del sistema. Se selecciona la carpeta y las
-fotografías que se necesitan cargar en <em>Subsurface</em> y se hace clic en el botón
-<em>Abrir</em>.</p></div>
+clic-derecho en la selección lo que nos mostrará el <a href="#S_DiveListContextMenu">Menú contextual de la lista de inmersiones</a>.
+Hacemos click-izquierdo en la opción apropiada para cargar las imágenes desde
+un archivo o desde internet y aparecerá el navegador del sistema. Selecciona
+la carpeta y las fotografías que necesiten cargarse en <em>Subsurface</em> y clica el
+botón <em>Abrir</em>.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/LoadImage2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Opción de carga de imágenes" />
@@ -2387,7 +2488,7 @@ posicionarlas en el perfil de la inmersión.</p></div>
</ul></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images//LoadImage3b_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de sincronización" />
+<img src="images//LoadImage3b_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Diálogo de sincronización" />
</div>
</div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
@@ -2404,22 +2505,33 @@ posicionarlas en el perfil de la inmersión.</p></div>
<em>Subsurface</em> sabe exactamente cuando se tomó la foto. Ajusta la fecha y hora en
el diálogo a la izquierda de la foto para que refleje los de la pantalla del
ordenador. Tras el ajuste <em>Subsurface</em> conoce exactamente cual es la diferencia
- entre cámara y ordenador y se podrán sincronizar. La figura anterior muestra una
- fotografía del ordenador de buceo y la herramienta de tiempo ajustada a la fecha
- y hora de la imagen <strong>B</strong> anterior.
+ entre cámara y ordenador y se podrán sincronizar. La figura a continuación
+ muestra una
+ fotografía del ordenador de buceo y la herramienta de tiempo ajustada a la
+ fecha y hora.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/LoadImage3c_f23.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Diálogo de sincronización" />
+</div>
+</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si la hora de la foto es muy anterior o posterior al buceo, no se sitúa sobre el
-perfil de la inmersión. Si está en un rango de 30 minutos, sí se muestra.</p></div>
+perfil de la inmersión (ver el aviso en rojo de la imágen anterior). Sin
+embargo, si se selecciona la casilla apropiada (ver imágen anterior) estas
+fotos aún pueden situarse en la pestaña <em>Fotos</em> del panel de <strong>Notas</strong> de forma
+que todas las fotos asociadas con un buceo puedan visualizarse, incluidas las
+que se hayan tomado antes o despues de la inmersión.</p></div>
</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_visualizar_las_imagenes">6.2. Visualizar las imágenes</h3>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_visualizar_las_imagenes">5.5.2. Visualizar las imágenes</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Después que las imágenes han sido cargadas aparecen en dos lugares:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-La pestaña <em>Fotos</em> del panel <em>Notas</em>.
+La pestaña <em>Fotos</em> del panel <em>Notas</em> (lado izquierdo de la imágen a
+continuación).
</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -2461,8 +2573,9 @@ sobre las imágenes. Las imágenes también puede borrase desde la pestaña <em
<img src="images/LoadImage6_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Foto a pantalla completa sobre el perfil de inmersión" />
</div>
</div>
+</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_la_pestana_em_fotos_em">6.2.1. La pestaña <em>Fotos</em></h4>
+<h4 id="_la_pestana_em_fotos_em">5.5.3. La pestaña <em>Fotos</em></h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las fotografías asociadas a una inmersión se muestran como miniaturas en la
pestaña <em>Fotos</em> del <em>Panel de inmersión</em>. Se puede acceder con facilidad a las
fotos hechas en rápida sucesión durante la inmersión, desde la pestaña <em>Fotos</em>.
@@ -2477,7 +2590,7 @@ teclado. Esto eliminará la foto tanto de la pestaña <em>Fotos</em> como del <e
la inmersión</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_fotos_en_disco_duro_externo">6.2.2. Fotos en disco duro externo</h4>
+<h4 id="_fotos_en_disco_duro_externo">5.5.4. Fotos en disco duro externo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La mayoría de fotosubs guardan sus fotografías en un disco duro externo. Si este
disco puede mapearse (como es casi siempre el caso) <em>Subsurface</em> puede acceder
directamente a las fotos. Esto facilita la interacción entre <em>Subsurface</em> y un
@@ -2493,14 +2606,14 @@ es el funcionamiento normal. Si, posteriormente, el disco externo con las fotos
se vuelve a conectar, las fotos se visualizarán normalmente.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_FindMovedImages">6.2.3. Mover fotografías entre directorios, discos duros u ordenadores</h4>
+<h4 id="S_FindMovedImages">5.5.5. Mover fotografías entre directorios, discos duros u ordenadores</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Tras haber cargado una fotografía en <em>subsurface</em> y haberla asociado a un buceo
determinado, se archiva el directorio donde la foto permanece guardada, para poder
encontrarla cuando se vuelva a abrir la inmersión. Si la foto o la colección
-completa de fotos se trasladan a otro disco o a una máquina distinta, sería
-bastante raro que la estructura de directorios fuera idéntica a la de la fotografía
-cargada originalmente. Cuando esto sucede, <em>Subsurface</em> busca las fotos en el
-directorio original desde el que fueron cargadas, no las encuentra y, por tanto,
+completa de fotos se trasladan a otro disco o a una máquina distinta, la ruta
+a la imágen cambia.
+Cuando esto sucede, <em>Subsurface</em> busca las fotos en el directorio original
+desde el que fueron cargadas, no las encuentra y, por tanto,
no las puede mostrar. Ya que, después de mover fotos, un gran número puede
necesitar borrarse y reimportarse desde la nueva localización, <em>Subsurface</em>
tiene un mecanismo que facilita el proceso de actualizar la información del
@@ -2559,9 +2672,11 @@ con <em>Guardar cambios</em>.</td>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_registrar_tipos_de_inmersion_especiales">6.3. Registrar tipos de inmersión especiales</h3>
+<h3 id="_registrar_tipos_de_inmersion_especiales">5.6. Registrar tipos de inmersión especiales</h3>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Esta sección da ejemplos de la verstilidad de <em>Subsurface</em> como herramienta de
+registro de inmersiones.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_MulticylinderDives">6.3.1. Inmersiones multi botella</h4>
+<h4 id="S_MulticylinderDives">5.6.1. Inmersiones multi botella</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> maneja fácilmente inmersiones que requieren más de una botella. El
buceo multi botella se produce habitualmente cuando (a) un buceador no tiene
bastante gas para completar una inmersión con una sola botella o (b) cuando el
@@ -2597,13 +2712,13 @@ dos clases de información que necesitan proporcionarse:</p></div>
cambio de gas" y seleccionar la botella apropiada entre las definidas en el
primer paso (ver imagen a continuación). Si el botón <strong>Barra de botellas</strong> de
la barra de herramientas se ha activado, los cambios también se indicarán en
- la barra.
+ la barra (ver imágen a continuación).
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Habiendo llevado a cabo estas tareas, <em>Subsurface</em> indica en el perfil de buceo
-el uso de diferentes botellas. A continuación, una inmersión multi botella que
-empieza con EAN28, se cambia a EAN50 despues de 26 minutos para efectuar la
+el uso de diferentes botellas. A continuación, una inmersión con dos botellas
+que empieza con EAN28, se cambia a EAN50 despues de 26 minutos para efectuar la
deco.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
@@ -2612,8 +2727,8 @@ deco.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_inmersiones_en_montaje_lateral_sidemount">6.3.2. Inmersiones en montaje lateral (sidemount)</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El buceo en montaje lateral es solo otra forma de buceo multi tanque, a menudo
+<h4 id="_inmersiones_en_montaje_lateral_sidemount">5.6.2. Inmersiones en montaje lateral (sidemount)</h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El buceo en montaje lateral es solo otra forma de buceo multi botella, a menudo
con ambas o todas las botellas conteniendo la misma mezcla. Aunque es una
configuración popular entre los espeleo buceadores, el buceo en lateral se
puede efectuar por buceadores recreativos que hayan completado el entrenamiento
@@ -2665,11 +2780,9 @@ adecuado. Registrar inmersiones en sidemount se hace en tres pasos:</p></div>
<img src="images/sidemount1.jpg" alt="FIGURE: Sidemount profile" />
</div>
</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Esta sección es un ejemplo de la versatilidad de <em>Subsurface</em> como herramienta
-de registro de inmersiones.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_sSCR_dives">6.3.3. Inmersiones con rebreather de circuito semi cerrado (SCR)</h4>
+<h4 id="S_sSCR_dives">5.6.3. Inmersiones con rebreather de circuito semi cerrado (SCR)</h4>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -2717,7 +2830,7 @@ oxígeno para la descompresión. Fíjate que la inmersión duró unas dos horas.
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_CCR_dives">6.3.4. Inmersiones con rebreather de circuito cerrado (CCR)</h4>
+<h4 id="S_CCR_dives">5.6.4. Inmersiones con rebreather de circuito cerrado (CCR)</h4>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -2738,12 +2851,15 @@ el diario directamente desde un CCR, sino que lo importa de la misma manera que
se importan datos de otras bases de datos digitales, una inmersión cada vez.</td>
</tr></table>
</div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_importar_una_inmersion_con_ccr">6.3.5. Importar una inmersión con CCR</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_importar_una_inmersion_con_ccr">Importar una inmersión con CCR</h5>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Véase la sección que trata de <a href="#S_ImportingAlienDiveLogs">Importar información de buceo de otras fuentes digitales</a>.
-Desde el menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em>, seleccionar <em>Import &#8594; Importar archivos
-de registro</em> para desplegar el <a href="#Unified_import">Diálogo de importación universal</a>.
+Los datos de las inmersiones con CCR se obtienen desde el software propietario
+obtenido al adquirir el equipo CCR. Vease <a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">Apéndice B</a>
+para mayor información. Utiliza dicho software para descargar los datos del
+buceo a una carpeta conocida. Desde el menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em>,
+seleccionar <em>Import &#8594; Importar archivos de registro</em> para desplegar el
+<a href="#Unified_import">Diálogo de importación universal</a>.
Como se explicaba en esa sección, en la parte de abajo a la derecha hay una lista
desplegable (etiquetada como <em>Filtro:</em>) de dispositivos que incluye los archivos del
(Poseidon) MKVI o APD (la funcionalidad para otros dispositivos CCR está en desarrollo
@@ -2753,8 +2869,8 @@ archivo concreto (en el caso del MKVI es un archivo con extensión .txt). Tras
seleccionar el archivo, activar el botón <em>Abrir</em> de abajo a la derecha. Lee la
sección a continuación para:</p></div>
</div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_informacion_mostrada_para_un_buceo_con_ccr">6.3.6. Información mostrada para un buceo con CCR</h4>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="_informacion_mostrada_para_un_buceo_con_ccr">Información mostrada para un buceo con CCR</h5>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Presiones parciales de los gases</em>: El gráfico de presión parcial de oxígeno
muestra la información de los sensores de oxígeno del equipo CCR. A diferencia
del equipo de circuito abierto (donde los valores de pO<sub>2</sub> se calculan en base
@@ -2875,11 +2991,12 @@ como descargar divelogs de CCR en el <a href="#_appendix_b_dive_computer_specifi
</div>
</div>
</div>
+</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_obtener_mas_informacion_sobre_inmersiones_guardadas_en_el_diario">7. Obtener más información sobre inmersiones guardadas en el diario</h2>
+<h2 id="_obtener_mas_informacion_sobre_inmersiones_guardadas_en_el_diario">6. Obtener más información sobre inmersiones guardadas en el diario</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_la_pestana_informacion_para_inmersiones_individuales">7.1. La pestaña Información (para inmersiones individuales)</h3>
+<h3 id="_la_pestana_informacion_para_inmersiones_individuales">6.1. La pestaña Información (para inmersiones individuales)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pestaña Información proporciona alguna información resumida
sobre un buceo en particular que ha sido seleccionado en la <strong>Lista de
inmersiones</strong>. La información útil incluye el intervalo en superficie antes de la
@@ -2899,7 +3016,7 @@ usuarios deberían consultar el <a href="#SAC_CALCULATION">Apéndice F</a> para
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ExtraDataTab">7.2. La pestaña <strong>Otros datos</strong> (para inmersiones individuales)</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ExtraDataTab">6.2. La pestaña <strong>Otros datos</strong> (para inmersiones individuales)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Cuando se utiliza un ordenador de buceo, a menudo facilita determinadas
informaciones que no pueden presentarse de forma estandarizada ya que la
naturaleza de la información varía de un ordenador a otro. Estos datos suelen
@@ -2915,7 +3032,7 @@ rebreather Poseidon.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_la_pestana_estadisticas_para_grupos_de_inmersiones">7.3. La pestaña Estadísticas (para grupos de inmersiones)</h3>
+<h3 id="_la_pestana_estadisticas_para_grupos_de_inmersiones">6.3. La pestaña Estadísticas (para grupos de inmersiones)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La pestaña Estadísticas facilita información resumida para más de una inmersión,
suponiendo que se haya seleccionado más de un buceo en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong>
tcon los estándares "Ctrl+clic" o "Shift+clic" del ratón. Si solo se ha
@@ -2927,7 +3044,7 @@ profundidad máxima de las inmersiones más profunda y más superficial de las
seleccionadas.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">7.4. El Perfil de inmersión</h3>
+<h3 id="S_DiveProfile">6.4. El Perfil de inmersión</h3>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Profile2.jpg" alt="Típico perfil de buceo" />
@@ -3000,9 +3117,226 @@ eficiente</td>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>La temperatura del agua</strong> se muestra con su propia línea azul con valores
situados junto a cambios significativos.</p></div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="S_InfoBox">6.4.1. La <strong>Caja de información</strong></h4>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La caja de información proporciona una gran cantidad de datos sobre el perfil
+de la inmersión. Normalmante, la caja de información se localiza en la esquina
+superior izquierda del panel del perfil. Si el ratón apunta fuera del panel
+del perfil, solo se mostrará la linea superior de la caja (ver la parte
+izquierda de la figura <strong>A</strong> a continuación). La caja de información puede
+desplazarse por el panel del Perfil de la inmersión, seleccionandolo y
+arrastrandolo con el ratón, de forma que no cubra alguna información
+importante del perfil. La posición del panel se guarda y se reutiliza en
+posteriores ocasiones.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/InfoBox2.jpg" alt="Figure: Information Box" />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Cuando el ratón apunta en el interior del panel del Perfil, la caja de
+información se expande y muestra diversas lineas de información. En esta
+situación, los datos reflejan el punto temporal a lo largo de la línea del
+perfil señalado por el cursor (ver la parte derecha de la figura <strong>B</strong> anterior).
+Al desplazar el cursor horizontalmente se muestra la información para
+cualquier momento de la inmersión.
+En este modo, la Caja de Información facilita abundantes estadísticas sobre
+profundidad, gases y característica del techo de una inmersión en particular.
+Entre ellas se incluyen: Momento de tiempo en la inmersión (indicado por un
+@), la profundidad, la presión de la botella (P), la Temperatura, el ritmo de
+ascenso y descenso, el Consumo de aire en superficie (CAS), la presión
+parcial de oxigeno, la profundidad máxima operativa de la mezcla (POM o MOD),
+la profundidad equivalente a aire (PEA o EAD), la profundidad narcótica equivalente
+(PNE o END), la profundidad equivalenta a la densidad del aire (EADD), los
+requisitos descompresivos en ese instante de tiempo (Deco), el Tiempo hasta la
+superficie (TTS), el techo calculado así como el techo calculado para varios
+compartimentos de tejidos de Bühlmann.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>El usuario tiene control sobre varios de los datos que se muestran en la Caja
+de Información, mostrados como cuatro de los botones en lka columna a la
+izquierda del panel del perfil. Estos son:</p></div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/MOD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Pulsar este botón hace que se muestre la <strong>Profundidad Máxima Operativa (POM)</strong>
+de la inmersión, en función del gas utilizado. La POM depende de la
+concentración de oxígeno en la mezcla respirada.
+Para el aire (21% de oxigeno) está alrededor de 57 metros si especificamos una
+pO<sub>2</sub> máxima de 1.4 en la sección <strong>Preferencias</strong> (seleccionar <em>Archivo</em> &#8594;
+<em>Preferencias</em> &#8594; <em>Grafico</em> y editar la casilla de texto <em>pO<sub>2</sub> al calcular la
+POM</em>). Por debajo de la POM se incrementa mucho el riesgo por
+exposición a los peligros de la toxicidad del oxígeno.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/NDL.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Pulsar este botón hace que se muestre en la Caja de Información el <strong>Límite de
+no Descompresión (NDL o LND)</strong> o el <strong>Tiempo total de Ascenso (TTS)</strong>. El LND es
+el tiempo que un buceador puede continuar con una inmersión a la profundidad
+actual, sin requerir descompresión (es decir, antes de que aparezca un
+techo). Una vez que el buceador ha excedido el NDL y se precisa descompresión
+(es decir, hay un techo de ascenso sobre el buceador) el TTS nos da el número
+de minutos necesarios antes de que el buceador pueda emerger. El TTS incluye
+el tiempo de ascenso y el tiempo de descompresión. El TTS se calcula
+utilizando en gas que se está usando en el momento, aunque existan cambios de
+gas previstos.
+Los TTS mayores a 2 horas resultan muy imprecisos y Subsurface solo indicará
+<em>TTS &gt; 2h</em>.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/SAC.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Pulsar en este botón hace que se muestre en la Caja de Información el
+*Consumo de Aire en Superfice (CAS o SAC). El CAS es una indicación del ritmo
+respiratorio del buceador normalizado a la presión de la superficie. El valor
+del CAS es menor que el ritmo respiratorio real porque un buceador a 10m
+consume gas a un ritmo casi el doble que el equivalente en superficie. El CAS
+nos calcula una indicación del ritmo respiratorio independiente de la
+profundidad de la inmersión, de forma que los ritmos respiratorios de
+diferentes inmersiones puedan compararse. Las unidades para el SAC son los
+litros/minuto o pies cúbicos/minuto.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="admonitionblock">
+<table><tr>
+<td class="icon">
+<img src="images/icons/EAD.jpg" alt="Note" />
+</td>
+<td class="content">Pulsar este botón hace que se muestre la <strong>Profundidad equivalente de Aire
+(PEA o EAD)</strong> para las inmersiones con nitrox y la <strong>Profundidad narcótica
+equivalente (PNE o END)</strong> para las inmersiones con trimix. Ambas son imprtantes
+para buceadores que respiren gases diferentes del aire. Sus valores dependen
+de la composición de la mezcla respirada. La PEA es la profundidad de una
+hipotética inmersión con aire que tenga la misma presión parcial de nitrógeno
+que la inmersión actual con nitrox. Una inmersión con nitrox lleva a la misma
+obligación descompresiva que una inmersión con aire a una profundidad igual a
+la PEA. La PNE es la profundidad de una inmersión hipotética con aire que
+tenga la misma suma de presiones parciales de gases narcóticos (oxígeno y
+nitrógeno) que la inmersión con trimix. Un buceador con trimix puede esperar
+el mismo efecto narcótico que en una inmersión con aire a una profundidad
+igual a la PNE.</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La figura <strong>B</strong> anterior muestra una Caja de Información con un conjunto de
+datos casi completo.</p></div>
+<div class="sect4">
+<h5 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">El gráfico de barras de presión de gases</h5>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>A la izquierda de la Caja de Información hay una barra gráfica vertical que
+muestra las presiones del nitrógeno (y otros gases inertes, p.e. el helio, en
+su caso) que el buceador estaba respirando en <em>un momento dado de la
+inmersión</em>. Se muestra por la posición del cursor en el <strong>Perfil de la
+inmersión</strong>. El dibujo en la parte inferior izquierda indica el significado de
+las diferentes partes del gráfico.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="image">
+<img src=":images/GasPressureBarGraph.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Barra gráfica de la presión de gases" />
+</span></p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+El área verde clara indica la presión del gasl, con el margen superior del
+área verde clara mostrando la presión total de TODOS los gases inhalados por el
+buceador y medida desde el fondo del gráfico hasta la parte alta del área verde
+clara.
+Esta presión es un valor relativo y no indica una presión absoluta.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+La línea negra horizontal por debajo del margen verde indica la presión de
+equilibrio de los gases inertes inhalados por el buceador, habitualmente
+nitrógeno. En el caso del trimix, es el valor combinado del nitrógeno y el
+helio. En este ejemplo, el buceador está buceando con EAN32, por tanto la
+presión de iequilibrio de los gases inertes está a un 68% de la distancia del
+fondo a la presión total de gases.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El área verde oscura de la parte inferior del gráfico representa las
+presiones de gases inertes en cada uno de los 16 compartimentos de tejidos
+usados en el algoritmo de Bühlmann, con los tejidos rápidos en el lado
+izquierdo.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+La línea negra horizontal superior indica el límite de presión de gas inerte
+determinado por el factor de gradiente que se aplica a la profundidad del
+buceador en el punto concreto del <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong>. El factor de gradiente
+mostrado es una interpolación entre los valores de GFbajo y GFalto especificados
+en la pestaña <em>Gráfico</em> del panel <strong>Preferencias</strong> de <em>Subsurface</em>.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El margen inferior del área roja del gráfico indica el Valor-M derivado de
+Bühlmann. Ese es el valor de la presión de gases inertes para el cual la
+formación de burbujas se espera que sea severa y resulte en un riesgo
+significativo de enfermedad descompresiva.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Estos cinco valores se muestran a la izquierda del gráfico anterior. La forma
+en que cambia la Barra Gráfica de Presión de Gases durante una inmersión puede
+verse a la derechade la figura anterior para un buceador usando EAN32.</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+El gráfico <strong>A</strong> indica el inicio de una inmersión, con el buceador en
+superficie. Las presiones en todos los compartimentos están aun a la presiñon
+de equilibrio en superficie porque no se ha buceado.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El gráfico <strong>B</strong> indica la situación tras un descenso a 30 metros. Pocos de
+los compartimentos han tenido tiempo para responder al descenso, por lo que
+las presiones de los gases están muy por debajo de de la presión de
+equilibrio.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El gráfico <strong>C</strong> representa las presiones tras 30 minutos a 30 metros. Los
+compartimentos rápidos han llegado al equilibrio (p.e. han alcanzado la altura
+de la línea negra que indica la presión de equilibrio. Los compartimentos
+lentos (hacia la derecha) no han alcanzado el equilibrio y están en el proceso
+de incrementar léntamente la presión.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El gráfico <strong>D</strong> muestra las presiones tras ascender a una profundidad de 4.5
+metros. Ya que durante el ascenso la presión total del gas inhalado ha
+descendido desde 4 bar a 1.45 bar, la presiones en los diferentes tejidos
+superan a la presión total y se acercan al valor del factor de gradiente (la
+linea negra horizontal superior). Continuar ascendiendo supondría exceder el
+valor del GFalto, poniendo en peligro al buceador.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El gráfico <strong>E</strong> indica la situación despues de haber permanecido a 4.5m
+durante 10 minutos. Los compartimentos rápidos han reducido la presión. Como
+era de esperar, las presiones en los compartimentos lentos no han cambiado
+mucho. Las presiones en los compartimentos rápidos no se aproximan al GFalto y
+el buceador está más seguro que en la situación indicada por el gráfico <strong>D</strong>.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_la_barra_de_herramientas_del_perfil">6.4.2. La Barra de herramientas del Perfil</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El perfil de inmersión puede incluir <strong>gráficos de presiones parciales</strong> de O2, N2
y He durante el buceo (ver la figura anterior) así como techos de deco
-calculados por <em>Subsurface</em> o registrados por el ordenador de buceo (solo
+calculados por <em>Subsurface</em> o regisrtrados por el ordenador de buceo (solo
visibles para buceos profundos, largos o repetitivos). La presión parcial del
oxígeno se indica en verde, la del nitrógeno en negro y la del helio en rojo
oscuro. Estos gráficos de presiones parciales se muestran bajo los datos de
@@ -3150,15 +3484,35 @@ en la figura de debajo).</td>
<td class="icon">
<img src="images/icons/ceiling3.jpg" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Si, además, se selecciona el botón <strong>Mostrar el techo calculado con incrementos
-de 3m</strong> entonces el techo se muestra con saltos de 3 en 3 metros.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
+<td class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Si, además, se selecciona el botón <strong>Mostrar el techo calculado con incrementos
+de 3m</strong> entonces el techo se muestra con saltos de 3 en 3 metros.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Ceilings2.jpg" alt="Figura: Techo con resolución de 3 metros" />
</div>
</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Los ajustes de los Factores de Gradiente afectan mucho a los techos calculados
+y sus profundidades. Para más información sobre Factores de Gradiente, vease
+la sección en <a href="#GradientFactors_Ref">Ajuste de Preferencias de los Factores de Gradiente</a>.
+Los Factores de Gradiente que se están utilizando (p.e. GF 30/75) se muestran
+sobre el perfil de profundidad si se activan los botones adecuados.
+N.B. Los facatores indicados <strong>NO</strong> son los utilizados por el ordenador de buceo
+para calcular las obligaciones descompresivas durante el buceo. Para más
+información externa a este manual ver:</p></div>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values
+de Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>*</strong>
+link:http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/503 7-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html[Gradient factors for dummies, de Kevin Watts]</p></div>
+</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -3181,55 +3535,132 @@ se muestran con una barra azul claro.</td>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/tissues.jpg" alt="Note" />
+<img src="images/icons/heatmap.png" alt="Note" />
</td>
-<td class="content">Muestra presiones de los gases inertes en los tejidos, en relación con la
-presión ambiental (línea gris horizontal).
-Las presiones en los tejidos se calculan utilizando el algoritmo Bühlmann ZH-16
-y se muestran como líneas de colores que varían desde el verde (tejidos rápidos)
-al azul (tejidos más lentos).
-La línea negra, dibujada sobre la presión ambiental, es la máxima sobresaturación
-de tejidos permitida, en la que se incluyen los factores de gradiente que se
-establecieron en <em>Preferencias</em>. Para buceadores que hacen buceo con descompresión
-planificada, se obtienen ritmos de desaturación eficientes manteniendo los tejidos
-entre la presión ambiental de los gases inertes (línea gris) y la presión límite
-(línea negra). Lo que se muestra en pantalla es una representación de la presión
-en los tejidos durante toda la inmersión. En contraste, el
-<a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gráfico de presión de gases</a> de la ventana <strong>Información</strong>
-del <strong>Perfil</strong> es un reflejo de las presiones de los tejidos en el instante de
-tiempo señalado por la posición del cursor sobre el perfil de la inmersión.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
+<td class="content">
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Muestra un mapa de calor de los tejidos. El mapa de calor resume, para la
+duración de la inmersión, las presiones de gases inertes para los 16
+compartimentos de tejidos del modelo de Bühlmann. Los colores azules indican
+presiones de gas bajas en un compartimento, del verde al rojo indican exceso
+de gas en el tejido y, por tanto, desgasificación. Las zonas superiores del
+gráfico corresponderían a los tejidos más rápidos y las inferiores a los más
+lentos. La figura a continuación explica en mayor detalle como puede
+interpretarse el mapa de calor.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
-<img src="images/tissuesGraph.jpg" alt="Figura: Gráfico de presión de gases inertes en los tejidos" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El ajuste de los factores de gradiente afecta mucho a los techos calculados y
-sus profundidades. Para más información acerca de factores de gradiente,
-consultar la sección <a href="#S_GradientFactors">Ajuste de preferencias de factores de gradiente</a>.
-Los factores de gradiente que se están utilizando(p.e. 35/75)
-aparecen sobre el gráfico de profundidad si se activan los botones adecuados de
-la barra de herramientas.
-<strong>N.B.</strong>: Los factores de gradiente indicados NO son los utilizados por el
-ordenador de buceo, sino los que utiliza <em>Subsurface</em> para calcular las
-obligaciones descompresivas durante la inmersión. Para una explicación más
-detallada de los factores de gradiente, consultar los siguientes links:</p></div>
+<img src="images/Heatmap.jpg" alt="Figure: Mapa de calor de gases inertes en los tejidos " />
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La imagen <strong>A</strong> a la izquierda muestra el <a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gráfico de presión de gas</a>
+de la <strong>Caja de Información</strong> con una instantanea de las presiones de gases
+inertes en un momento dado de la inmersión. Las presiones de los gases inertes
+en los 16 compartimentos de tejidos se muestran como barras verticales verdes
+oscuras con los tejidos rápidos a la izquierda y los lentos a la derecha. Para
+más detalles, visita la sección <a href="#S_gas_pressure_graph">Gráfico de presión de gases</a>.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La imagen <strong>B</strong> muestra un gradiente de colores únicos que ocupa todo el rango
+de de presiones de gases inertes.
+Es posible relacionar la altura de cada una de las barras verticales verdes de
+<strong>A</strong> con un color de <strong>B</strong>. Por ejemplo, la barra verical verde en <strong>A</strong> situada
+más a la izquierda (tejido más rápido) tiene una altura que se correspondería
+con el color verde intermedio de <strong>B</strong>. La altura de esta barra puede, pues,
+resumirse en un color verde intermedio. De forma similar, la barra más alta de
+<strong>A</strong> es tan alta como la parte amarilla de <strong>B</strong>. Las otras 14 barras de presión
+de los tejidos tambien pueden trasladarse a colores. Los colores representan
+tres rangos de presión de gases inertes en los tejidos:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
-<a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a>
+El rango inferior de <strong>B</strong> (marcado <em>on-gassing</em>) incluye colores desde el
+azul claro al negro, representando presiones por debajo de la presión de
+equilibrio de gas inerte (linea horizontal inferior en <strong>A</strong>). La unidad de
+medida es el porcentaje de presión de gas inerte en relación a la presión de
+equilibrio. En este nivel tiene lugar la carga de gases inertes porque la
+presión de los mismos en los tejidos es inferior a la presión ambiental. Las
+zonas negras del mapa de calor indican que un tejido ha alcanzado la presión
+de equilibrio, por ejemplo, la presión de gases inertes en el tejido ha
+alcanzado la del agua en la que se encuentra el buceador. La presión de
+equilibrio cambia deacuerdo con la profundidad.
</p>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<a href="http://www.rebreatherworld.com/general-and-new-to-rebreather-articles/5037-gradient-factors-for-dummies.html">Gradient factors for dummies, by Kevin Watts</a>
+El rango central de <strong>B</strong> incluye colores que van desde el negro al verde
+claro, cuando la presión de los gases inertes de un compartimento es mayor que
+la presión de equilibrio, pero menor que la presión ambiental. En esta zona,
+la descompresión no es muy eficiente porque el gradiente de presiones de gases
+inertes entre el compartimento de tejidos y el entorno es relativamente
+pequeño y viene indicado por las zonas verde oscuro del mapa de calor.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+El rango superior de <strong>B</strong> (marcado <em>off-gassing</em>) incluye colores que van
+desde el verde claro hasta rojo y blanco, representando presiones en los
+tejidos superiores a la presión ambiental total (arriba de la zona verde claro
+de <strong>A</strong>). Estas presiones de tejidos se alcanzan normalmente al ascender a una
+profundidad menor.
+Por debajo de un valor de 100%, este rango indica una descarga eficiente de
+gases inertes desde los compartimentos de tejidos al ambiente. Habitualmente,
+una descarga eficiente viene representada por colores verde claro, amarillo y
+naranja.
+Por encima del 100% (rojo a blanco en <strong>B</strong>) se excede el gradiente del Valor-M
+y la probabilidad de enfermedad descompresiva se incrementa notablemente.
</p>
</li>
</ul></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La imagen <strong>C</strong> muestra la equivalencia de los colores con con cada una de las
+barras verticales de <strong>A</strong>, los tejidos rápidos de la izquierda dibujados arriba
+y los compartimentos de tejidos lentos abajo en <strong>C</strong>. La barra vertical más
+alta de <strong>A</strong> (la tercera por la izquierda) se presenta como el tercer
+rectangulo amarillo desde arriba en <strong>C</strong>. Las 16 barras verticales de <strong>A</strong> se
+presentan ahora como una columna vertical de 16 rectangulos de colores,
+representando una instantane,a en un momento concreto de la inmersión, de las
+presiones parciales de los compartimentos de tajidos.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La imagen <strong>D</strong> es una recopilación de equivalencias de color similares de los
+16 compartimentos de tejidos durante un periodo de 10 minutos de un buceo, los
+colores representan la carga de gases inertes de un compartimento de tejido en
+un momento del tiempo durante la inmersión. Los tejidos más rápidos se
+muestran arriba, y los más lentos abajo, con el tiempo formando el eje
+horizontal del gráfico. La columna de rectangulos de <strong>C</strong> se puede encontrar
+entre los 9 y los 10 minutos.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Los colores del mapa de calor no se ven afectados por los ajustes de los
+Factores de Gradiente. Esto se debe a que el mapa indica presiones de tejidos
+relativas al gradiente del Valor-M de Bühlmann, y no relativas a ningún Factor
+de Gradiente especifico. Para más información externa a este manual ver:</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p><a href="http://www.tek-dive.com/portal/upload/M-Values.pdf">Understanding M-values by Erik Baker, <em>Immersed</em> Vol. 3, No. 3.</a></p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>Al no verse afectados los colores del mapa de calor por los factores de
+gradiente, el mapa también es aplicable cuando se utilice el modelo de
+descompresión VPM-B.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La imagen a continuación muestra los perfiles y mapas de calor de dos
+inmersiones planificadas con descompresión a 60m:
+La primera utilizando el modelo descompresivo de Bühlmann, la segunda usando
+el modelo descompresivo VPM-B.
+Ambos perfiles tienen el mismo tiempo total de descompresión, pero el modelo
+VPM-B requiere paradas más profundas y más tempranas en la fase de ascenso.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>En ambos perfiles, las presiones de gases inertes en los tejidos rápidos crecen
+mucho más deprisa que en los lentos, atravesando una secuencia desde el azul
+claro al púrpura y negro.
+De forma similar, la presión de los gases inertes en los tejidos rápidos se
+reduce más deprisa que en los tejidos lentos en cada parada deco, con los
+colores variando desde el rojo al negro, pasando por naranja, amarillo y
+verde.</p></div>
+<div class="paragraph"><p>La comparación de los dos perfiles y mapas de calor muestra que al incluir
+paradas profundas, el gradiente se sobresaturación de los tejidos rapidos se
+reduce antes en la fase de ascenso.
+Sin embargo, la carga de gases continua en los tejidos lentos durante las
+paradas profundas, lo que lleva a un mayor gradiente de sobresturación de los
+tejidos lentos al final de la inmersión.</p></div>
+<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
+<div class="content">
+<img src="images/tissueHeatmap.jpg" alt="Figure: Inert gas tissue pressure heat-map" />
</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_el_menu_contextual_del_perfil_de_inmersion">7.5. El menú contextual del Perfil de Inmersión</h3>
+</div>
+</td>
+</tr></table>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect3">
+<h4 id="_el_menu_contextual_del_perfil_de_inmersion">6.4.3. El menú contextual del Perfil de Inmersión</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se accede al menú contextual del Perfil de Inmersión haciendo clic-derecho
mientras el cursor del ratón está sobre el panel del Perfil de Inmersión. El
menú permite la creación de marcadores, eventos de cambio de gas o cambios
@@ -3246,222 +3677,14 @@ circuito cerrado. Si hacemos clic-derecho mientras estamos sobre
un marcador preexistente, el menú se extiende añadiendo opciones para permitir
el borrado del marcador o permitir ocultar todos los marcadores de ese tipo.</p></div>
</div>
-<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_InfoBox">7.6. El <strong>Recuadro Información</strong></h3>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El recuadro de Información muestra una amplia gama de información del <strong>perfil de
-inmersión</strong>. Normalmente el recuadro se situa en la parte de arriba a la
-izquierda del panel <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong>. Si el ratón apunta fuera del panel,
-solo es visible la linea superior del recuadro (ver figura (<strong>A</strong>) abajo). El
-recuadro puede moverse en el panel <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong> pulsando y
-arrastrándolo con el ratón de forma que no cubra detalles importantes. La
-posición del recuadro queda guardada y se usará de nuevo en los siguientes
-análisis.</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/InfoBox2.jpg" alt="Figura: Recuadro de Información" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>En el momento en que el ratón apunta dentro del panel <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong>, el
-recuadro de información se expande y muestra varios detalles de datos. En esta
-situación, los datos reflejan el punto temporal a lo largo del perfil indicado
-por el cursor del ratón (ver la parte derecha de la figura (<strong>B</strong>) anterior donde
-el recuadro refleja la información en la posición de la [flecha] del cursor en
-esa imagen). Por lo tanto, mover el cursor en dirección horizontal permite que
-el recuadro muestre información para cualquier punto a lo largo del perfil.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>En este modo, el recuadro de información da extensas estadísticas sobre la
-profundidad, el gas y el techo de la inmersión. Entre ellas se incluyen: el
-lapso de tiempo en el buceo (indicado con @), la profundidad (Prof), la presión
-de la botella (Pres), la temperatura, la velocidad de ascenso/descenso, el
-consumo de aire en superficie (CAS), la presión parcial de oxígeno, la
-profundidad máxima operativa (PMO), la profundidad equivalente al aire (PEA), la
-profundidad narcótica equivalente (PNE), la densidad equivalente al aire (EADD),
-los requisitos descompresivos en ese momento del tiempo (Deco), el tiempo hasta
-la superficie (TTS), el techo calculado, así como el techo calculado para varios
-compartimentos de tejidos Bühlmann.</p></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>El usuario tiene control sobre como se muestran varias estadísticas,
-representadas en cuatro de los botones a la izquierda del panel del perfil.
-Son:</p></div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/MOD.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Activar este botón hace que el Recuadro de Información muestre la <strong>Profundidad
-máxima operativa (PMO)</strong> de la inmersión para la mezcla de gases utilizada. La
-PMO depende de la concentración de oxígeno en el gas respirado. Para el aire
-(21% de oxígeno) se sitúa alrededor de 57 m si se ha especificado una pO<sub>2</sub>
-máxima de 1.4 en la sección <strong>Preferencias</strong>. Por debajo de la PMO existe un
-riesgo muy elevado de exposición a los peligros asociados con la toxicidad del
-oxígeno.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/NDL.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Activar este botón hace que el recuadro Información muestre, bien el <strong>Límite
-de no descompresión (LND)</strong> o el <strong>*Tiempo total hasta superficie (TTS)</strong>. El
-LND es el tiempo que un buzo puede permanecer sumergido a la profundidad actual
-sin requerir descompresión (esto es, sin que aparezca un techo para el ascenso).
-Una vez que se ha excedido el LND y se requiere descompresión, el TTS incluirá
-el total de minutos requeridos antes de que el buceador pueda salir a superficie.
-El TTS incluye el tiempo de ascenso y las paradas de descompresión. Se calcula
-suponiendo que se usa el gas actual. Incluso si el perfil incluye varios
-cambios de gas, el TTS en un momento dado de la inmersión se habrá calculado
-con el gas en uso en ese momento. Para TTS superiores a 2 horas, no se calcula
-con precisión y simplemente se indica <em>TTS &gt; 2h</em>.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/SAC.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Activar este botón hace que el Recuadro de información muestre el <strong>Consumo de
-aire en superficie (CAS)</strong>. El CAS es un indicador del ritmo respiratorio del
-buceador calculado a nivel del mar. El valor del CAS es inferior al real ya que
-un buceador a 10m usa aproximadamente el doble del que consume en superficie. El
-SAC da una indicación del ritmo de consumo de gas independientemente de la
-profundidad de la inmersión de forma que se pueden comparar los ritmos de
-diferentes inmersiones. Las unidades del CAS son litros/min o pies^3/min.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="admonitionblock">
-<table><tr>
-<td class="icon">
-<img src="images/icons/EAD.jpg" alt="Note" />
-</td>
-<td class="content">Activar este botón hace que el Recuadro de información muestre la <strong>Profundidad
-equivalente al aire (PEA)</strong> para los buceos con nitrox y la <strong>Profundidad
-narcótica equivalente (PNE)</strong> para buceos con trimix. Estas magnitudes son
-importantes para buceadores que utilicen mezclas de gases distintas del aire.
-Sus valores dependen de la composición del gas respirado. La PEA es la
-profundidad de un hipotético buceo con aire que tenga la misma presión parcial
-de nitrógeno que la inmersión con nitrox actual. Una inmersión con nitrox
-conllevaría una obligación de descompresión igual que una inmersión con aire a
-una profundidad igual a la PEA. La PNE es la profundidad de una hipotética
-inmersión con aire que tenga la misma suma de presiones parciales de gases
-narcóticos (oxígeno y nitrógeno) que la actual inmersión con trimix. Un buceador
-con trimix puede esperar los mismos efectos narcóticos que un buceador
-respirando aire a una profundidad igual a la PNE.</td>
-</tr></table>
-</div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>La figura (<strong>B</strong>) anterior muestra un Recuadro de Información con un conjunto de
-datos casi completo.</p></div>
-<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="S_gas_pressure_graph">7.6.1. El gráfico de barras de presión de gases</h4>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>A la izquierda del <strong>Recuadro de Información</strong> hay un gráfico de barras vertical
-que indica las presiones de los gases inertes que el buceador estaba respirando
-<em>en un momento dado de la inmersión</em>, señalado por la posición del cursor sobre
-el <strong>Perfil de inmersión</strong>. La figura abajo a la izquierda indica el significado
-de las diferentes partes del gráfico de barras.</p></div>
-<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
-<div class="content">
-<img src="images/GasPressureBarGraph.jpg" alt="FIGURE:Gráfico de barras de presiones de gases" />
-</div>
-</div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-El área verde claro indica el gas total, con el margen superior de esta zona
- indicando la presión total de gas inhalada por el buceador y medida desde el
- fondo del gráfico a la parte superior. Esta presión tiene un valor <em>relativo</em>
- en el gráfico y no indica presión absoluta.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-La línea negra horizontal por debajo de la zona verde claro indica la presión de
- equilibrio de los gases inertes respirados, habitualmente nitrógeno. En el caso
- del trimix, es la presión combinada del helio y el nitrógeno. En este ejemplo,
- el usuario esta buceando con EAN32, por lo tanto la presión del gas inerte está
- al 68% de la distancia desde el fondo del gráfico hasta el valor de la presión
- total.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-La zona verde oscura en la parte baja del gráfico representa las presiones de
- los gases inertes en cada uno de los 16 compartimentos de tejidos, según el
- algoritmo de Bühlmann, estando los tejidos rápidos en el lado izquierdo.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-La línea horizontal negra superior indica el factor de gradiente que se aplica
- a la profundidad del buceador para el punto concreto del <strong>Perfil de Inmersión</strong>.
- Este factor de gradiente es una interpolación entre el GFbajo y el GFalto que
- se hayan especificado en la pestaña Gráfico del <strong>Panel de preferencias</strong> de
- <em>Subsurface</em>.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-El margen inferior de la zona roja del gráfico indica el valor M derivado de
- Bühlman, o sea el valor de la presión de gases inertes a partir de la cual la
- formación de burbujas se espera que sea severa, resultando en una enfermedad
- descompresiva.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
-<div class="paragraph"><p>Estos cinco valores se indican a la izquierda en la figura anterior. La forma
-en que el gráfico de barras cambia durante una inmersión, se representa en el
-lado derecho de la figura anterior, para un buceador usando EAN32.</p></div>
-<div class="ulist"><ul>
-<li>
-<p>
-El gráfico <strong>A</strong> indica la situación al inicio de una inmersión, con el buzo
- en superficie. Las presiones en los compartimentos de tejidos todavía están
- a la presión de equilibrio ya que aún no se ha buceado.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-El gráfico <strong>B</strong> indica la situación tras un descenso a 30 metros. Pocos de
- los compartimentos de tejidos han tenido tiempo de responder al descenso, las
- presiones de los gases muy por debajo de presión de equilibrio.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-El gráfico <strong>C</strong> representa las presiones tras 30 minutos a 30 metros. Los
- compartimentos rápidos han llegado al equilibrio (p.e. han alcanzado la altura
- de la línea negra que indica la presión de equilibrio). Los compartimentos más
- lentos (hacia la derecha) no han alcanzado el equilibrio y están en proceso de
- incrementar lentamente la presión.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-El gráfico <strong>D</strong> muestra las presiones tras ascender a una profundidad de 4.5
- metros. Ya que, durante el ascenso, la presión total del gas inhalado ha caído
- mucho, de 4 bares a 1.45 bares, las presiones en los diferentes compartimentos
- de tejidos sobrepasan la presión total del gas y se aproximan al factor de
- gradiente (la línea negra superior en la imagen). Continuar el ascenso haría
- que rebasáramos el valor del factor de gradiente (GFalto), poniendo en peligro
- al buceador.
-</p>
-</li>
-<li>
-<p>
-El gráfico <strong>E</strong> indica la situación después de permanecer a 4.5 metros durante
- 10 minutos. Los compartimentos rápidos han bajado su presión. Como era de
- esperar, las presiones en los compartimentos lentos no han variado mucho. Las
- presiones en los compartimentos rápidos ya no se acercan al valor de GFalto y
- el buceador está más seguro que en la situación expuesta en el gráfico <strong>D</strong>.
-</p>
-</li>
-</ul></div>
-</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_organizar_el_registro_manipular_grupos_de_inmersiones">8. Organizar el registro (Manipular grupos de inmersiones)</h2>
+<h2 id="_organizar_el_registro_manipular_grupos_de_inmersiones">7. Organizar el registro (Manipular grupos de inmersiones)</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_el_menu_contextual_de_la_lista_de_inmersiones">8.1. El menú contextual de la Lista de Inmersiones</h3>
+<h3 id="S_DiveListContextMenu">7.1. El menú contextual de la Lista de Inmersiones</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Varias acciones sobre, bien una inmersión, bien un grupo de ellas, se pueden
efectuar utilizando el Menú Contextual de la Lista de inmersiones, al que se
accede seleccionando una inmersión o un grupo de ellas y haciendo clic-derecho.</p></div>
@@ -3473,7 +3696,7 @@ accede seleccionando una inmersión o un grupo de ellas y haciendo clic-derecho.
<div class="paragraph"><p>El menú contextual se usa en muchas de las acciones que se describen a
continuación.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_personalizar_las_columnas_mostradas_en_el_panel_strong_lista_de_inmersiones_strong">8.1.1. Personalizar las columnas mostradas en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong></h4>
+<h4 id="_personalizar_las_columnas_mostradas_en_el_panel_strong_lista_de_inmersiones_strong">7.1.1. Personalizar las columnas mostradas en el panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong></h4>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/DiveListOptions.jpg" alt="Ejemplo: Opciones de la Lista de inmersiones" />
@@ -3489,7 +3712,7 @@ la lista, esta se actualiza inmediatamente. Las preferencias para la informació
que muestre la lista se guardan y reutilizan cada vez que se abre <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_seleccionar_inmersiones_en_una_ubicacion_concreta">8.1.2. Seleccionar inmersiones en una ubicación concreta</h4>
+<h4 id="_seleccionar_inmersiones_en_una_ubicacion_concreta">7.1.2. Seleccionar inmersiones en una ubicación concreta</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores tienen largas listas de inmersiones, y puede resultar difícil
localizar todos los buceos en un punto en concreto. Presionando <em>Ctrl+F</em> en el
teclado se abre una casilla de texto en la parte de arriba a la izquierda de la
@@ -3499,7 +3722,7 @@ en esta ubicación.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Renumber">8.2. Renumerar las inmersiones</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Renumber">7.2. Renumerar las inmersiones</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las inmersiones normalmente se numeran incrementando desde las no-recientes
(menores números de secuencia) a las más recientes (números de secuencia más
altos). Numerar los buceos no siempre es consistente. Por ejemplo, cuando se
@@ -3517,7 +3740,7 @@ renumerado. Aparecerá una ventana solicitando al usuario que especifique el
número de inicio para el proceso de numeración.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Group">8.3. Agrupar las inmersiones en viajes y manipularlos</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Group">7.3. Agrupar las inmersiones en viajes y manipularlos</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si buceas regularmente, la lista de inmersiones puede hacerse rápidamente muy
larga. <em>Subsurface</em> puede agrupar los buceos en <em>viajes</em>. Lo hace agrupando
inmersiones que tengan fechas/horas que no estén separadas más de dos días y
@@ -3535,7 +3758,7 @@ lista de inmersiones (desde el menú principal) se selecciona <em>Registro →
Autoagrupar</em>. El panel Lista de Inmersiones ahora muestra solo los títulos de
los viajes.</p></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_editar_el_titulo_y_la_informacion_asociada_a_un_viaje_en_particular">8.3.1. Editar el título y la información asociada a un viaje en particular</h4>
+<h4 id="_editar_el_titulo_y_la_informacion_asociada_a_un_viaje_en_particular">7.3.1. Editar el título y la información asociada a un viaje en particular</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Normalmente, en la lista de inmersiones se incluye una mínima información en el
título del viaje. Puede añadirse mucha más sobre un viaje seleccionando su
título en la lista. Esto muestra una pestaña <strong>Notas del Viaje</strong> en el panel Notas
@@ -3546,24 +3769,25 @@ El título en la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> debería reflejar ya algo
información editada.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_ver_los_buceos_de_un_viaje_en_concreto">8.3.2. Ver los buceos de un viaje en concreto</h4>
+<h4 id="_ver_los_buceos_de_un_viaje_en_concreto">7.3.2. Ver los buceos de un viaje en concreto</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Una vez que las inmersiones agrupadas en viajes, los usuarios pueden expandir
-uno o más viajes clicando la punta de flecha a la izquierda del título. Con ello
-se expande el viaje mostrando los buceos individuales efectuados.</p></div>
+uno o más viajes clicando el botón de expansión [+/-] a la izquierda del
+título. Con ello se expande el viaje mostrando los buceos individuales
+efectuados.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_colapsar_o_expandir_informacion_de_diferentes_viajes">8.3.3. Colapsar o expandir información de diferentes viajes</h4>
+<h4 id="_colapsar_o_expandir_informacion_de_diferentes_viajes">7.3.3. Colapsar o expandir información de diferentes viajes</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Tras seleccionar un viaje concreto de la lista, el menú contextual resultante
ofrece varias posibilidades de expandir o contraer buceos incluidos en viajes.
Entre ellas expandir todos los viajes y contraer todos los viajes.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_mezclar_inmersiones_de_mas_de_un_viaje_en_uno_solo">8.3.4. Mezclar inmersiones de más de un viaje en uno solo</h4>
+<h4 id="_mezclar_inmersiones_de_mas_de_un_viaje_en_uno_solo">7.3.4. Mezclar inmersiones de más de un viaje en uno solo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Tras seleccionar el título de un viaje del panel <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong>, el
menú permite mezclar viajes con el viaje de abajo o con el de arriba.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_separar_un_viaje_en_mas_de_uno">8.3.5. Separar un viaje en más de uno</h4>
+<h4 id="_separar_un_viaje_en_mas_de_uno">7.3.5. Separar un viaje en más de uno</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si un viaje incluye diez inmersiones, el usuario puede separar el viaje en dos
(viaje 1: cuatro inmersiones de arriba; viaje 2: seis inmersiones de abajo)
seleccionando y haciendo clic-derecho en las cuatro inmersiones de arriba. El menú
@@ -3579,16 +3803,16 @@ izquierda (A), la acción completada a la derecha (B):</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_manipular_inmersiones_individuales">8.4. Manipular inmersiones individuales</h3>
+<h3 id="_manipular_inmersiones_individuales">7.4. Manipular inmersiones individuales</h3>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_borrar_una_inmersion_del_diario">8.4.1. Borrar una inmersión del diario</h4>
+<h4 id="_borrar_una_inmersion_del_diario">7.4.1. Borrar una inmersión del diario</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las inmersiones pueden borrarse permanentemente del diario seleccionándolas y
haciendo clic-derecho para mostrar el menú y, entonces, seleccionando <strong>Borrar
inmersión</strong>. Habitualmente esto se hará en casos donde se desee borrar
inmersiones de prueba o buceos de duración extremadamente corta.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_separar_una_inmersion_de_un_viaje">8.4.2. Separar una inmersión de un viaje</h4>
+<h4 id="_separar_una_inmersion_de_un_viaje">7.4.2. Separar una inmersión de un viaje</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se pueden separar inmersiones del viaje al que pertenecen. Para ello se
selecciona y hace clic-derecho en los buceos para mostrar el menú. Luego se
selecciona <strong>Quitar inmersión(es) del viaje</strong>. Las inmersiones que han sido
@@ -3596,14 +3820,14 @@ separadas aparecerán ahora encima o debajo del viaje al que pertenecieron, en
función de la fecha y la hora de la inmersión separada.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_anadir_una_inmersion_al_viaje_de_arriba">8.4.3. Añadir una inmersión al viaje de arriba</h4>
+<h4 id="_anadir_una_inmersion_al_viaje_de_arriba">7.4.3. Añadir una inmersión al viaje de arriba</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Las inmersiones seleccionadas pueden moverse del viaje al que pertenecen al
inmediatamente superior al actual. Para ello se selecciona y hace clic-derecho
en los buceos para mostrar el menú, luego se selecciona <strong>Añadir inmersión(es) al
viaje de arriba</strong>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_desplazar_la_hora_de_inicio_del_buceo_s">8.4.4. Desplazar la hora de inicio del buceo(s)</h4>
+<h4 id="_desplazar_la_hora_de_inicio_del_buceo_s">7.4.4. Desplazar la hora de inicio del buceo(s)</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>En ocasiones es necesario ajustar la hora de comienzo de una inmersión. Esto
puede aplicarse a situaciones en las que las inmersiones se han efectuado en
diferentes zonas horarias o si el ordenador de buceo tiene mal configurada la
@@ -3613,7 +3837,7 @@ horas y minutos) en el que deben ajustarse los buceos y se hace clic en la
opción que indica si el ajuste debe ser hacia adelante o hacia atrás.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_juntar_buceos_en_uno_solo">8.4.5. Juntar buceos en uno solo</h4>
+<h4 id="_juntar_buceos_en_uno_solo">7.4.5. Juntar buceos en uno solo</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>En ocasiones una inmersión se interrumpe brevemente, p.e. si un buceador regresa
a superficie unos pocos minutos, dando como resultado dos o más inmersiones
grabadas por el ordenador y apareciendo como buceos distintos en el panel <strong>Lista
@@ -3631,7 +3855,7 @@ inmersiones que fueron unidas:</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_deshacer_manipulaciones_de_inmersiones">8.4.6. Deshacer manipulaciones de inmersiones</h4>
+<h4 id="_deshacer_manipulaciones_de_inmersiones">7.4.6. Deshacer manipulaciones de inmersiones</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se pueden deshacer o rehacer acciones importantes, de las que se han comentado
anteriormente, sobre inmersiones o viajes. Aquí se incluyen: <em>Borrar inmersión</em>,
<em>Mezclar inmersiones</em>, <em>Renumerar inmersiones</em> y <em>Desplazar hora de buceo</em>.
@@ -3641,7 +3865,7 @@ con las posibilidades <em>Deshacer</em> y <em>Rehacer</em>.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Filter">8.5. Filtrar la Lista de Inmersiones</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Filter">7.5. Filtrar la Lista de Inmersiones</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Los buceos del panel <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> pueden filtrarse, esto es, se pueden
seleccionar únicamente algunos de los buceos basándose en sus atributos, p.e.
las etiquetas, el lugar de buceo, el divemaster, compañeros o traje protector.
@@ -3683,7 +3907,7 @@ en las que aparezcan las etiquetas "cueva" <em>O</em> "barco", solas o conjuntam
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_ExportLog">9. Exportar el registro de inmersiones o parte del mismo</h2>
+<h2 id="S_ExportLog">8. Exportar el registro de inmersiones o parte del mismo</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay dos posibilidades de exportar información de buceo desde <em>Subsurface</em>:</p></div>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
@@ -3699,7 +3923,7 @@ Exportar información de buceo a <em>Facebook</em>
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_facebook">9.1. Exportar información de buceo a <em>Facebook</em></h3>
+<h3 id="S_facebook">8.1. Exportar información de buceo a <em>Facebook</em></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La exportación de inmersiones a <em>Facebook</em> se maneja de forma diferente a otros
tipos de exportación porque se requiere una
conexión a esta red social y se necesita un usuario de <em>Facebook</em> y su password.
@@ -3715,8 +3939,8 @@ para cerrar la conexión a <em>Facebook</em>.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Desde la ventana de <em>Subsurface</em> es fácil saber si se tiene una conexión válida
-con <em>Facebook</em>. Desde el <strong>Menú principal</strong>, selecciona <em>Compartir &#8594; Facebook</em>
-(ver imagen <strong>A</strong> a continuación. Normalmente la opción <em>Facebook</em> está
+con <em>Facebook</em>. Desde el <strong>Menú principal</strong>, selecciona <em>Compartir</em>
+(ver imagen <strong>A</strong> a continuación). Normalmente la opción <em>Facebook</em> está
desactivada, pero, si hay una conexión establecida, la opción está activa y
puede ser selecciionada.
Tras haber establecido una conexión con <em>Facebook</em>, transferir un perfil de
@@ -3749,7 +3973,7 @@ solución para evitar subidas no deseadas en el historial público.</p></div>
el menú principal, clicando el botón correspondiente en el panel <em>Facebook</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Export_other">9.2. Exportar información de buceo a otros destinos o formatos</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Export_other">8.2. Exportar información de buceo a otros destinos o formatos</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para exportar a otros destinos,
se llega a la función de exportación seleccionando <em>Archivo &#8594; Exportar</em> lo que
despliega el diálogo de exportación. Este diálogo siempre ofrece dos opciones:
@@ -3882,7 +4106,7 @@ Solo exportar lista: Solo se exportará una lista de inmersiones. No se
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">10. Guardar un diario de <em>Subsurface</em> en la Nube</h2>
+<h2 id="S_Cloud_access">9. Guardar un diario de <em>Subsurface</em> en la Nube</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para cualquier buceador, la información contenida en su diario es muy importante.
No es únicamente un registro de actividades de buceo para su propio placer
@@ -3901,7 +4125,7 @@ duro. El único requisito es que, previamente, nos hemos de registrar como
usuarios. Para utilizar el <em>Almacenamiento en la nube de Subsurface</em> sigue estos
pasos:</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_crea_una_cuenta_en_el_almacenamiento_en_la_nube">10.1. Crea una cuenta en el almacenamiento en la nube:</h3>
+<h3 id="_crea_una_cuenta_en_el_almacenamiento_en_la_nube">9.1. Crea una cuenta en el almacenamiento en la nube:</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -3948,7 +4172,7 @@ Clica de nuevo en <em>Aplicar</em> o en <em>OK</em> y la cuenta del <em>Almacena
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_usar_el_em_almacenamiento_de_subsurface_en_la_nube_em">10.2. Usar el <em>Almacenamiento de Subsurface en la nube</em></h3>
+<h3 id="_usar_el_em_almacenamiento_de_subsurface_en_la_nube_em">9.2. Usar el <em>Almacenamiento de Subsurface en la nube</em></h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -3978,7 +4202,7 @@ En la pestaña de <em>Preferencias predeterminadas</em> se puede seleccionar usa
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Cloud_storage">10.3. Acceso web al <em>Almacenamiento de Subsurface en la nube</em></h3>
+<h3 id="S_Cloud_storage">9.3. Acceso web al <em>Almacenamiento de Subsurface en la nube</em></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Uno de los efectos interesantes de utilizar el <em>Almacenamiento de Subsurface
en la nube</em> es que también se puede acceder a los datos con cualquier navegador.
Simplemente se abre <a href="https://cloud.subsurface-divelog.org">https://cloud.subsurface-divelog.org</a>,
@@ -3990,7 +4214,7 @@ por ejemplo, presiones de botellas, techos deco o presiones parciales de
O<sub>2</sub>/He/N<sub>2</sub>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_otros_servicios_en_la_nube">10.4. Otros servicios en la nube</h3>
+<h3 id="_otros_servicios_en_la_nube">9.4. Otros servicios en la nube</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Si se prefiere no usar el almacenamiento en la nube integrado (y no se necesita
tener acceso vía web a los datos), también resulta muy fácil guardar los
divelogs en la nube usando uno de los servicios disponibles en internet.</p></div>
@@ -4027,7 +4251,7 @@ la nube.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">11. Imprimir un diario</h2>
+<h2 id="S_PrintDivelog">10. Imprimir un diario</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> proporciona un interfaz simple y flexible para imprimir el diario
completo o solo unas pocas inmersiones seleccionadas. Se pueden utilizar
@@ -4169,7 +4393,7 @@ A continuación un ejemplo (bastante pequeño) de la salida de una página.</p><
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_escribir_una_plantilla_de_impresion_a_medida_avanzado">11.1. Escribir una plantilla de impresión a medida (avanzado)</h3>
+<h3 id="_escribir_una_plantilla_de_impresion_a_medida_avanzado">10.1. Escribir una plantilla de impresión a medida (avanzado)</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Escribir una plantilla a medida es una forma efectiva de producir impresiones
altamente personalizadas. Subsurface utiliza plantillas HTML con Grantlee como
sistema de impresión. Se puede crear una plantilla, exportar una nueva plantilla,
@@ -4179,7 +4403,7 @@ como escribir o modificar una plantilla.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Configure">12. Configurar un ordenador de buceo</h2>
+<h2 id="S_Configure">11. Configurar un ordenador de buceo</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> permite configurar algunos ordenadores de buceo. En estos momentos,
los Heinrichs-Weikamp OSTC2 y OSTC3 y los Suunto de la familia Vyper (Stinger,
@@ -4237,7 +4461,7 @@ ordenador de buceo, este será cargado al mismo.
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Preferences">13. Ajustar las Preferencias del usuario para <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="S_Preferences">12. Ajustar las Preferencias del usuario para <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay varios ajustes en <em>Subsurface</em> que el usuario puede especificar. Se
encuentran a través de <em>Archivo → Preferencias</em>. Los ajustes se efectúan en
@@ -4248,7 +4472,7 @@ los ajustes que desee modificar, luego guárdarlos usando el botón <strong>Apli
Tras aplicarlos todos se puede salir seleccionando <strong>Aceptar</strong> o <strong>Cerrar sin
guardar</strong> si finalmente decide no hacer los cambios.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_predeterminados">13.1. Predeterminados</h3>
+<h3 id="_predeterminados">12.1. Predeterminados</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay varios ajustes en el panel <strong>Predeterminados</strong>:</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
@@ -4321,7 +4545,7 @@ guardar</strong> si finalmente decide no hacer los cambios.</p></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<strong>Servicio web de Subsurface</strong>: Cuando uno se suscribe al <a href="#S_Companion">servicio web de Subsurface</a>, se proporciona una ID de usuario muy larga y
+<strong>Servicio web de Subsurface</strong>: Cuando uno se suscribe al <a href="#S_iCompanion">servicio web de Subsurface</a>, se proporciona una ID de usuario muy larga y
difícil de recordar. Este es el lugar donde guardar esa ID. Seleccionando la
opción <em>¿Guardar localmente la ID de usuario?</em> nos aseguramos de que se guarda
una copia de dicha ID en el ordenador.
@@ -4336,7 +4560,7 @@ guardar</strong> si finalmente decide no hacer los cambios.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_unidades">13.2. Unidades</h3>
+<h3 id="_unidades">12.2. Unidades</h3>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Pref2_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Página de preferencias de unidades" />
@@ -4358,7 +4582,7 @@ Igualmente, las coordenadas GPS pueden representarse de la forma tradiciona
a tus necesidades.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_grafico">13.3. Gráfico</h3>
+<h3 id="_grafico">12.3. Gráfico</h3>
<div class="imageblock" id="S_CCR_options" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
<img src="images/Pref3_f20.jpg" alt="FIGURA: Página de Preferencias del gráfico" />
@@ -4505,7 +4729,7 @@ Factores de gradiente (GF_bajo y GF_alto)<strong>: Se fijan los <em>factores
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_lenguaje">13.4. Lenguaje</h3>
+<h3 id="_lenguaje">12.4. Lenguaje</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se elige el lenguaje que debe utilizar <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
<div class="content">
@@ -4521,11 +4745,11 @@ lista de traducciones. La casilla de texto <em>Filtro</em> permite listar lengua
similares. Por ejemplo hay diversas variantes de inglés o francés.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_red">13.5. Red</h3>
+<h3 id="_red">12.5. Red</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Este panel facilita la comunicación entre <em>Subsurface</em> y las fuentes de datos en
internet.</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Esto es importante cuando <em>Subsurface</em> tiene que comunicarse con servicios como
-el <a href="#S_Companion">servicio web de <em>Subsurface</em></a> o importar/exportar datos de
+el <a href="#S_iCompanion">servicio web de <em>Subsurface</em></a> o importar/exportar datos de
<em>Divelogs.de</em>. El acceso a internet viene determinado por el tipo de conexión y
por el proveedor de acceso (ISP) utilizado. El ISP debería proporcionar la
información necesaria.</p></div>
@@ -4574,7 +4798,7 @@ información necesaria.</p></div>
<li>
<p>
<em>Servicio web de Subsurface</em>:
- Al suscribirnos al <a href="#S_Companion">Servicio web de Subsurface</a>, se nos
+ Al suscribirnos al <a href="#S_iCompanion">Servicio web de Subsurface</a>, se nos
facilita una identificación de usuario muy larga y dificil de recordar.
Este es el lugar donde guardarla. Seleccionando la opción, nos asegurammos
de tener una copia local de la misma.
@@ -4583,7 +4807,7 @@ información necesaria.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Facebook">13.6. Acceso a Facebook</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Facebook">12.6. Acceso a Facebook</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Este panel nos permite acceder a una cuenta de <em>Facebook</em> para poder enviar
información desde <em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
<div class="imageblock" style="text-align:center;">
@@ -4599,7 +4823,7 @@ Ver la sección <a href="#S_facebook">Exportar perfiles de inmersión a Facebook
para más información.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_georefencia">13.7. Georefencia</h3>
+<h3 id="_georefencia">12.7. Georefencia</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> proporciona un servicio de búsqueda geográfica (Esto es, la
capacidad de buscar el nombre de un lugar, en base a unas coordenadas
geográficas proporcionadas haciendo clic en el panel <strong>Globo</strong>, de un GPS o
@@ -4616,7 +4840,7 @@ la imagen a continuación</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">14. El Planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="S_DivePlanner">13. El Planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>La planificación de inmersiones es una característica avanzada de <em>Subsurface</em>
accesible desde <em>Registro &#8594; Planificar Inmersión</em> en el menú principal. Permite
@@ -4674,7 +4898,7 @@ Un usuario que no este completamente seguro de cualquiera de los requisitos
</ul></div>
</div></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_la_pantalla_del_planificador_de_em_subsurface_em">14.1. La pantalla del planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h3>
+<h3 id="_la_pantalla_del_planificador_de_em_subsurface_em">13.1. La pantalla del planificador de <em>Subsurface</em></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Al igual que el diario de <em>Subsurface</em>, la pantalla del planificador se divide
en varias secciones (ver imagen a continuación). Los parámetros de ajuste de una
inmersión se introducen en las diversas secciones a la izquierda de la pantalla.
@@ -4695,7 +4919,7 @@ cualquier mensaje de aviso sobre el plan de buceo.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_inmersiones_con_circuito_abierto">14.2. Inmersiones con circuito abierto</h3>
+<h3 id="_inmersiones_con_circuito_abierto">13.2. Inmersiones con circuito abierto</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -4744,6 +4968,38 @@ En la tabla etiquetada como <em>Gases disponibles</em>, añadir la información
</li>
<li>
<p>
+La tabla <em>Gases disponibles</em> incluye tres campos para profundidades,
+ etiquetados:
+</p>
+<div class="ulist"><ul>
+<li>
+<p>
+Cambio deco a: La profundidad de cambio para gases deco. A menos que las
+ cambie el usuario, se calcularan automáticamente en base a la preferencia de
+ pO₂ para la deco (por defecto 1.6 bar).
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+PMO Fondo: La profundidad máxima opertiv del gas, si se utiliza como gas
+ de fondo. Calculada automáticamente en base la preferencia de pO₂ (por
+ defecto 1.4 bar). Editar este campo modificará el O₂% de acuerdo con la
+ profundidad marcada. Ajustalo a <em>'*</em>' para calcular el mejor O₂% para la
+ profundidad máxima del buceo.
+</p>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
+MND: La profundidad narcótica máxima del gas. Calculada automáticamente en
+ base a la preferencia marcada como END (por defecto 30m). Editar este campo
+ modificará el He% de acuerdo con la profundidad marcada. Ajustala a <em>'*</em>'
+ para calcular el mejor He% para la profundidad máxima.
+</p>
+</li>
+</ul></div>
+</li>
+<li>
+<p>
El perfil del buceo a planificar se puede crear de dos maneras:
</p>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
@@ -4775,7 +5031,7 @@ La forma más eficiente de crear un perfil es introducir los valores
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_inmersiones_recreativas">14.2.1. Inmersiones recreativas</h4>
+<h4 id="_inmersiones_recreativas">13.2.1. Inmersiones recreativas</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El modo recreativo es lo que más se aproxima a planificar una inmersión
basándonos en el límite de no descompresión (LND). Tiene en cuenta el tiempo
que un buceador puede estar a la profundidad actual sin incurrir en paradas
@@ -4889,7 +5145,7 @@ ascenso.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_inmersiones_en_circuito_abierto_no_recreativas_incluyendo_descompresion">14.2.2. Inmersiones en circuito abierto no recreativas, incluyendo descompresión</h4>
+<h4 id="_inmersiones_en_circuito_abierto_no_recreativas_incluyendo_descompresion">13.2.2. Inmersiones en circuito abierto no recreativas, incluyendo descompresión</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>La planificación no recreativa supone exceder los límites de no descompresión
y/o utilizar múltiples gases. Tales inmersiones se planifican en tres fases:</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>a) Control de gases inertes</strong>: Esto se consigue especificando las velocidades
@@ -5025,7 +5281,7 @@ muestran separadamente de las duraciones de las paradas en cada nivel.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_con_pscr">14.3. Planificar inmersiones con pSCR</h3>
+<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_con_pscr">13.3. Planificar inmersiones con pSCR</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para planificar una inmersión usando un rebreather pasivo de circuito
semi-cerrado, selecciona <em>pSCR</em> en lugar de <em>Circuito abierto</em> en la lista
desplegable.
@@ -5050,7 +5306,7 @@ circuito por la caída de oxígeno en la boquilla del equipo pSCR.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_con_ccr">14.4. Planificar inmersiones con CCR</h3>
+<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_con_ccr">13.4. Planificar inmersiones con CCR</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para planificar una inmersión utilizando un rebreather de circuito cerrado,
selecciona la opción <em>CCR</em> en la lista desplegable (en un circulo azul en la
imagen a continuación.</p></div>
@@ -5079,7 +5335,7 @@ pero, desde luego, lo hace para ascensos de emergencia en circuito abierto.</p><
gas para un segmento en CCR, por tanto, lo normal es obtener valores de 0 l.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_Replan">14.5. Modificar un plan de inmersión existente</h3>
+<h3 id="S_Replan">13.5. Modificar un plan de inmersión existente</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Normalmente, cuando se ha guardado un plan de inmersión, se encuentra disponible
desde la <strong>Lista de Inmersiones</strong> como cualquier buceo. Desde la <strong>Lista de
Inmersiones</strong> no hay forma de cambiar un plan. Para efectuar cambios a un plan de
@@ -5089,7 +5345,7 @@ el planificador, permitiendo hacer las modificaciones oportunas y guardarlas de
la forma habitual.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_sucesivas">14.6. Planificar inmersiones sucesivas</h3>
+<h3 id="_planificar_inmersiones_sucesivas">13.6. Planificar inmersiones sucesivas</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se pueden planear fácilmente inmersiones sucesivas si la fecha y hora de las
mismas se especifican correctamente en el campo arriba a la izquierda <em>Hora de
inicio</em>. <em>SUbsurface</em> calcula las cargas de gases inertes de la primera
@@ -5106,7 +5362,7 @@ de la <strong>Lista de inmersiones</strong> y se activa el planificador: el plan
en cuenta la configuración de la plantilla seleccionada.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_imprimir_el_plan_de_inmersion">14.7. Imprimir el plan de inmersión</h3>
+<h3 id="_imprimir_el_plan_de_inmersion">13.7. Imprimir el plan de inmersión</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Seleccionar el botón <em>Imprimir</em> permite imprimir los <em>Detalles del plan de
buceo</em> para unas "wet notes". También se pueden copiar y pegar los <em>Detalles del
plan de buceo</em> para incluirlos en un archivo de texto o un procesador de
@@ -5126,13 +5382,13 @@ registro de inmersión.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_descripcion_de_las_opciones_del_menu_principal_de_em_subsurface_em">15. Descripción de las opciones del menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
+<h2 id="_descripcion_de_las_opciones_del_menu_principal_de_em_subsurface_em">14. Descripción de las opciones del menú principal de <em>Subsurface</em></h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Esta sección describe las funciones y manejo de las opciones del menú principal
de <em>Subsurface</em>. Varias de las opciones que veremos luego son links a secciones
de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_archivo">15.1. Archivo</h3>
+<h3 id="_archivo">14.1. Archivo</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5211,7 +5467,7 @@ de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importar">15.2. Importar</h3>
+<h3 id="_importar">14.2. Importar</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5227,7 +5483,7 @@ de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
</li>
<li>
<p>
-<a href="#S_Companion"><em>Importar datos GPS del Servicio web de Subsurface</em></a> - Carga
+<a href="#S_iCompanion"><em>Importar datos GPS del Servicio web de Subsurface</em></a> - Carga
coordenadas GPS desde la app para teléfonos móviles.
</p>
</li>
@@ -5240,7 +5496,7 @@ de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_registro">15.3. Registro</h3>
+<h3 id="_registro">14.3. Registro</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5306,7 +5562,7 @@ de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_vista">15.4. Vista</h3>
+<h3 id="_vista">14.4. Vista</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5360,7 +5616,7 @@ de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_ayuda">15.5. Ayuda</h3>
+<h3 id="_ayuda">14.5. Ayuda</h3>
<div class="ulist"><ul>
<li>
<p>
@@ -5391,10 +5647,10 @@ de este manual que describen las operaciones con más detalle.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">16. APÉNDICE A: Información específica del sistema operativo para importar inmersiones desde un ordenador de buceo.</h2>
+<h2 id="_apendice_a_informacion_especifica_del_sistema_operativo_para_importar_inmersiones_desde_un_ordenador_de_buceo">15. APÉNDICE A: Información específica del sistema operativo para importar inmersiones desde un ordenador de buceo.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_asegurate_de_que_el_so_tiene_instalados_los_drivers_necesarios">16.1. Asegúrate de que el SO tiene instalados los drivers necesarios</h3>
+<h3 id="_asegurate_de_que_el_so_tiene_instalados_los_drivers_necesarios">15.1. Asegúrate de que el SO tiene instalados los drivers necesarios</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5433,7 +5689,7 @@ de documentos y software de Silicon Labs</a>.
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">16.2. Como encontrar el nombre de dispositivo para conexiones USB y ajustar sus permisos de escritura</h3>
+<h3 id="S_HowFindDeviceName">15.2. Como encontrar el nombre de dispositivo para conexiones USB y ajustar sus permisos de escritura</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5532,7 +5788,7 @@ escritura para el puerto USB, el interface del ordenador de buceo puede
conectarse y se debería poder importar las inmersiones.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">16.3. Ajustar manualmente dispositivos con bluetooth</h3>
+<h3 id="S_HowFindBluetoothDeviceName">15.3. Ajustar manualmente dispositivos con bluetooth</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5563,7 +5819,7 @@ fabricante. Si se está usando un Shearwater Predator/Petrel/Nerd, hay que selec
</li>
</ul></div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_en_windows_2">16.3.1. En Windows:</h4>
+<h4 id="_en_windows_2">15.3.1. En Windows:</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Probablemente bluetooth ya esté activado. Para emparejar el dispositivo se
selecciona <em>Panel de Control → Dispositivos Bluetooth → Añadir dispositivo
Inalámbrico</em>. Esto debería desplegar un diálogo que mostraría tu ordenador de
@@ -5578,7 +5834,7 @@ puerto COM. Si no, introdúcelo manualmente.</p></div>
software después, intenta borrar el emparejamiento y volverlo a hacer.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_en_macos">16.3.2. En MacOS:</h4>
+<h4 id="_en_macos">15.3.2. En MacOS:</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Clica en el símbolo Bluetooth en la barra de menú y selecciona <em>Configurar
Dispositivo Bluetooth …</em>. Asegúrate de que tu ordenador de buceo está en modo
upload; entonces debería mostrar la lista de dispositivos. Selecciónalo y pasa
@@ -5589,7 +5845,7 @@ en el desplegable <em>Dispositivo o punto de montaje</em> del diálogo <strong>I
<em>Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect3">
-<h4 id="_en_linux">16.3.3. En Linux</h4>
+<h4 id="_en_linux">15.3.3. En Linux</h4>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Asegúrate de que tienes activado el ordenador con <em>Subsurface</em>. En las
distribuciones más habituales esto debería ser cierto de entrada y el
emparejamiento debería se fácil. Por ejemplo, Gnome3 muestra un icono Bluetooth
@@ -5822,10 +6078,10 @@ de montaje o dispositivo (p.e. <em>/dev/rfcomm0</em>) y pulsa <em>Descargar</em>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">17. APÉNDICE B: Información específica por ordenadores de buceo.</h2>
+<h2 id="_appendix_b_dive_computer_specific_information_for_importing_dive_information">16. APÉNDICE B: Información específica por ordenadores de buceo.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">17.1. Importar desde un Uemis Zurich</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportUemis">16.1. Importar desde un Uemis Zurich</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5860,7 +6116,7 @@ tenga que repetir esta operación más de una vez dependiendo de cuantos buceos
haya guardados en el ordenador.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">17.2. Importar buceos desde el Galileo de Uwatec</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingGalileo">16.2. Importar buceos desde el Galileo de Uwatec</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5891,7 +6147,7 @@ página de descargas del software SmarTrak.</p></div>
OSX 10.6 o superior.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">17.3. Importar buceos desde Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDR5">16.3. Importar buceos desde Heinrichs Weikamp DR5</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5908,7 +6164,7 @@ seguridad, de la calculada por el DR5.</td>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingXDeep">17.4. Importar desde xDEEP BLACK</h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingXDeep">16.4. Importar desde xDEEP BLACK</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5927,7 +6183,7 @@ mostraría el xDEEP BLACK.</td>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importar_del_shearwater_predator_petrel_nerd_usando_bluetooth">17.5. Importar del Shearwater Predator/Petrel/Nerd usando Bluetooth</h3>
+<h3 id="_importar_del_shearwater_predator_petrel_nerd_usando_bluetooth">16.5. Importar del Shearwater Predator/Petrel/Nerd usando Bluetooth</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5939,7 +6195,7 @@ se facilitan instrucciones específicas para descargar inmersiones usando Blueto
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">17.6. Importar desde el Poseidon MKVI Discovery</h3>
+<h3 id="S_PoseidonMkVI">16.6. Importar desde el Poseidon MKVI Discovery</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -5976,7 +6232,7 @@ comprimida del diario utilizando un formato propio.
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> accede a los archivos .txt y .csv para obtener información.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_importar_desde_el_ccr_apd_inspiration">17.7. Importar desde el CCR APD Inspiration</h3>
+<h3 id="_importar_desde_el_ccr_apd_inspiration">16.7. Importar desde el CCR APD Inspiration</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -6072,7 +6328,7 @@ se registran en el equipo APD pero pueden completarse a mano desde la pestaña
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="_apendice_c_exportar_informacion_de_diarios_desde_otros_softwares_externos">18. APÉNDICE C: Exportar información de diarios desde otros softwares externos.</h2>
+<h2 id="_apendice_c_exportar_informacion_de_diarios_desde_otros_softwares_externos">17. APÉNDICE C: Exportar información de diarios desde otros softwares externos.</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>La importación de datos de diarios de buceos desde softwares externos se
efectúa, habitualmente, utilizando el dialogo que resulta de seleccionar
@@ -6097,7 +6353,7 @@ Importar el diario accesible a <em>Subsurface</em>.
diarios desde softwares externos. Los procedimientos a continuación se aplican
mayormente en Linux y/o Windows.</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">18.1. Exportar desde <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3, DM4 o DM5)</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivesSuunto">17.1. Exportar desde <strong>Suunto Divemanager (DM3, DM4 o DM5)</strong></h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -6275,7 +6531,7 @@ Los buceos se han exportado al archivo DM4.bak (o DM5.bak)
</ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="Atomic_Export">18.2. Exportar desde Atomic Logbook</h3>
+<h3 id="Atomic_Export">17.2. Exportar desde Atomic Logbook</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -6289,7 +6545,7 @@ Este archivo se puede importar directamente a <em>Subsurface</em>.</td>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="Mares_Export">18.3. Exportar desde Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3>
+<h3 id="Mares_Export">17.3. Exportar desde Mares Dive Organiser V2.1</h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -6331,7 +6587,7 @@ La password para acceder al archivo .zip es <em>mares</em>.
</ol></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="S_ImportingDivingLog">18.4. Exportar desde <strong>DivingLog 5.0 y 6.0</strong></h3>
+<h3 id="S_ImportingDivingLog">17.4. Exportar desde <strong>DivingLog 5.0 y 6.0</strong></h3>
<div class="admonitionblock">
<table><tr>
<td class="icon">
@@ -6380,7 +6636,7 @@ a efectuar es guardar el diario en _Subsurface</em>.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_Appendix_D">19. APÉNDICE D: Exportar una hoja de cálculo a formato CSV</h2>
+<h2 id="S_Appendix_D">18. APÉNDICE D: Exportar una hoja de cálculo a formato CSV</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p>Muchos buceadores mantienen un diario en alguna forma de archivo digital, en
muchos casos en una hoja de cálculo con varios campos de información. Estos
@@ -6426,7 +6682,7 @@ Posición GPS: Se deben utilizar grados decimales, p.e. 30.22496 30.821798
</li>
</ol></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_em_libreoffice_calc_em_y_em_openoffice_calc_em">19.1. <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> y <em>OpenOffice Calc</em></h3>
+<h3 id="_em_libreoffice_calc_em_y_em_openoffice_calc_em">18.1. <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> y <em>OpenOffice Calc</em></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Son aplicaciones de hojas de cálculo de código abierto que forman parte de
suits mayores que, a su vez, también son código abierto. La interacción del
usuario con <em>LibreOffice Calc</em> y _OpenOffice Calc_es muy similar.</p></div>
@@ -6458,7 +6714,7 @@ usen como coma decimal), luego seleccionar <em>OK</em>.</p></div>
se importaría como se explicó en <a href="#S_ImportingCSVDives">Importar inmersiones desde archivos <em>CSV</em> manuales</a>.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_microsoft_em_excel_em">19.2. Microsoft <em>Excel</em></h3>
+<h3 id="_microsoft_em_excel_em">18.2. Microsoft <em>Excel</em></h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>El delimitador de campos (llamado "separador de listas" en los manuales de
Microsoft) no está accesible desde <em>Excel</em> y debe ajustarse desde el <em>Panel de
Control</em>. Tras cambiar el carácter separador todo el software del ordenador con
@@ -6538,7 +6794,7 @@ un editor de textos y luego importar los datos de buceo como se explicó en
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_APPENDIX_E">20. APÉNDICE E: Escribir una plantilla de impresión a medida</h2>
+<h2 id="S_APPENDIX_E">19. APÉNDICE E: Escribir una plantilla de impresión a medida</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> proporciona un mecanismo para crear o modificar plantillas que
permite producir impresiones a medida de los divelogs. Las plantillas escritas
@@ -6590,7 +6846,7 @@ carpeta donde se halle el divelog (por ejemplo One Dive, Six Dives, Table, etc).
<div class="paragraph"><p>Para escribir una plantilla a medida, deben existir los siguientes elementos
para que puedan ser manejadas e interpretadas:</p></div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_bucle_principal">20.1. Bucle principal</h3>
+<h3 id="_bucle_principal">19.1. Bucle principal</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> pasa una lista de inmersiones llamada (<strong>dives</strong>) al sistema <em>Grantlee</em>.
Se puede iterar sobre la lista de la siguiente manera:</p></div>
<div class="literalblock">
@@ -6610,7 +6866,7 @@ Se puede iterar sobre la lista de la siguiente manera:</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Se puede encontrar información sobre <em>Grantlee</em> <a href="http://www.grantlee.org/apidox/for_themers.html">aquí</a></p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_variables_pasadas_a_grantlee">20.2. Variables pasadas a Grantlee</h3>
+<h3 id="_variables_pasadas_a_grantlee">19.2. Variables pasadas a Grantlee</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Solo se pasa un subconjunto de los datos de una inmersión:</p></div>
<div class="tableblock">
<table rules="all"
@@ -6688,6 +6944,66 @@ cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">gas</p></td>
<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) datos de la botella</p></td>
</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">rating</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>int</strong>) calificación de la inmersión, varía entre 0 y 5</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">sac</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) valor del SAC para la inmersión</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">tags</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) lista de etiquetas para la inmersión</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">gas</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) lista de gases usados en la inmersión</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">suit</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) traje usado para la inmersión</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">cylinders</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) información completa de las botellas usadas</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">cylinder0-7</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) información sobre una botella concreta</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">weights</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) información completa de todo el sistema de lastre</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">weight0-5</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) información de una pieza concreta de lastre</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">maxcns</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) valor del máximo CNS de la inmersión</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">otu</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) valor del OTU de la inmersión</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">sumWeight</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) suma del lastre de la inmersión</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">startPressure</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) la presión inicial</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">endPressure</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) la presión final</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">firstGas</p></td>
+<td align="left" valign="top"><p class="table">(<strong>string</strong>) primer gas utilizado</p></td>
+</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</div>
@@ -6798,7 +7114,7 @@ cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
</div></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_selectores_css_definidos">20.3. Selectores CSS definidos</h3>
+<h3 id="_selectores_css_definidos">19.3. Selectores CSS definidos</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Como el perfil se coloca después del renderizado, <em>Subsurface</em> usa unos selectores
<em>CSS</em> especiales para ejecutar algunas búsquedas en la salida HTML. Deben añadirse
los selectores de la siguiente tabla:</p></div>
@@ -6841,7 +7157,7 @@ páginas</p></td>
de distribución de flujo (cuando datos-número de buceos = 0).</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_atributos_especiales">20.4. Atributos especiales</h3>
+<h3 id="_atributos_especiales">19.4. Atributos especiales</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p>Hay dos formas de renderizar: bien renderizar un número concreto de buceos por
página, bien hacer que <em>Subsurface</em> intente introducir tantas inmersiones como
sea posible en una sola página.</p></div>
@@ -6875,10 +7191,10 @@ imprimir en cualquier tamaño de página.</p></div>
</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1">
-<h2 id="S_APPENDIX_F">21. APÉNDICE F: Preguntas Frecuentes</h2>
+<h2 id="S_APPENDIX_F">20. APÉNDICE F: Preguntas Frecuentes</h2>
<div class="sectionbody">
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_em_subsurface_em_parece_calcular_mal_el_consumo_de_gas_y_el_cas">21.1. <em>Subsurface</em> parece calcular mal el consumo de gas y el CAS</h3>
+<h3 id="_em_subsurface_em_parece_calcular_mal_el_consumo_de_gas_y_el_cas">20.1. <em>Subsurface</em> parece calcular mal el consumo de gas y el CAS</h3>
<div class="paragraph" id="SAC_CALCULATION"><p><em>Pregunta</em>: Buceé con una botella de 12,2 l empezando con 220 bar y terminando
con 100 bar y yo calculo un CAS distinto al que calcula <em>Subsurface</em> ¿Está
calculándolo mal <em>Subsurface</em>?</p></div>
@@ -6910,7 +7226,7 @@ altas presiones. A 400 bar realmente no contiene el doble de aire que a 200 bar.
A presiones más bajas, el aire se comporta bastante como un gas ideal.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_algunos_perfiles_de_inmersion_tienen_discrepancias_de_tiempos_con_las_muestras_que_toma_mi_ordenador_de_buceo">21.2. Algunos perfiles de inmersión tienen discrepancias de tiempos con las muestras que toma mi ordenador de buceo …</h3>
+<h3 id="_algunos_perfiles_de_inmersion_tienen_discrepancias_de_tiempos_con_las_muestras_que_toma_mi_ordenador_de_buceo">20.2. Algunos perfiles de inmersión tienen discrepancias de tiempos con las muestras que toma mi ordenador de buceo …</h3>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Subsurface</em> termina por ignorar el tiempo en superficie por varios motivos
(profundidad media, tiempo de inmersión, CAS, etc).</p></div>
<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Pregunta</em>: ¿Por qué las duraciones de los buceos en mi ordenador difieren de
@@ -6925,7 +7241,7 @@ mucho rato pero pasar la mayor parte del tiempo en superficie. En este caso no
querrás que te cuente como algún tipo de inmersión larga.</p></div>
</div>
<div class="sect2">
-<h3 id="_se_han_perdido_algunos_perfiles_en_la_descarga">21.3. Se han perdido algunos perfiles en la descarga</h3>
+<h3 id="_se_han_perdido_algunos_perfiles_en_la_descarga">20.3. Se han perdido algunos perfiles en la descarga</h3>
<div class="paragraph" id="DC_HISTORY"><p><em>Pregunta</em>: No consigo descargar todas mis inmersiones, solo las más recientes,
incluso aunque el manual de mi ordenador de buceo afirma que guarda el historial
de, por ejemplo, 999 buceos.</p></div>
@@ -6948,7 +7264,7 @@ sido sobrescritos.</p></div>
<div id="footnotes"><hr /></div>
<div id="footer">
<div id="footer-text">
-Last updated 2015-12-15 13:35:29 PST
+Last updated 2016-11-07 21:15:48 PST
</div>
</div>
</body>